Home

2008 RT Town & Country Owner Manual

1. Summer Operation lessen 318 Winter Operation llle ees 319 Vacation Storage rade inkaene 319 Window Fogging 0000 319 Outside Air Intake 0 319 Operating TIPS 6e 244 IA 320 A C Air Filter If Equipped 320 lll Electric Rear Window Defroster If Equipped sus mob RE HEIDARY A ESI RES 320 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 INSTRUMENT PANELS AND CONTROLS 81bb7b62 1 Air Vent 5 Analog Clock 9 DVD If Equipped 13 Hazard Switch 2 Instrument Cluster 6 Upper Compartment 10 Pull Out Cup Holder 14 Ignition Switch 3 Transmission Shifter 7 Lower Compartment 11 Storage Cubby 15 Dimmer Switch 4 Radio 8 Climate Controls 12 Power Supply 12V 16 Head Light Switch 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER GAS 80 100 60 km h ae d 81c6a2bd UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER GAS 80 100 60 km h ae d Ri 81c6a2b2 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 0 gallons 7 8 liters this light will turn on and remain on until
2. Jack Location 2 2 00 0000 eee eee 412 Towing With The Ignition Ke 8 8 y 410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel above the radio To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers depress the switch on the instrument panel When the Hazard Warn ing Switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emer gency Push the switch a second time to turn OFF the flashers This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is OFF NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning Flash ers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped shift the transmission gear selector lever into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
3. Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no UConnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes redial previous record again ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration SEATS The seating options available in this vehicle are the result of extensive customer research and evaluations Seats are also a primary part of the Occupant Restraint protection System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR V
4. 398 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS Engine Transmission GCWR Gross Com bined Wt Rating Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt 3 8L amp 4 0L Auto matic with trailer tow package 9 000 Ibs 4 082 kg 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m Up to 2 persons amp Luggage 3 800 Ibs 1 723 kg 380 Ibs 172 kg 9 000 Ibs 4 082 kg 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m 3 to 5 persons amp Luggage 3 350 Ibs 1 519 kg 335 Ibs 152 kg 9 000 Ibs 4 082 kg 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m 6 to 7 persons amp Luggage 3 000 Ibs 1 360 kg 300 Ibs 136 kg For vehicles equipped with Fold in Floor seating the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 Ibs 45 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information Section in this manual TRAILER AND TRAILER TONGUE WEIGHT Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to severely sway side to side which will cause loss of control of
5. lesse 14 Ill minated Entry cese tk Re xm 21 Immobilizer Sentry Key lessen 15 Infant Restraint se eetis tree ie ee ee 84 86 Information Center Vehicle 244 Inside Rearview Mirror less 103 Instrument Cluster Ls 226 227 228 Instrument Panel and Controls 225 Instrument Panel Cover 00006 469 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning A71 Integrated Power Module Fuses 473 Interior Appearance Care n annaa annaa 469 Interior Lights llle esee 163 164 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 172 Introduction isse ke em 4 Jack Location 2 0 0 00 eee 412 Jack Operation 2 6 0 0 eee ee eee 412 Jump Starting 22em9 ee x me times 424 Key Programming aree xr en 17 Key Replacement llsslllleeese 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer 15 Key In Reminder 0 000000 eee eee 15 Keyless Entry System seacte kedas esaea 22 nn INDEX 523 KOS Wedge ace ec s RR E dae Kee ok OR we REARS 12 Knee Bolster eriten erre edu dr Yd 70 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 000000 60 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildret 25 ye ERES OE ele ea Ae 88 Latches HOO PER 160 Lead Free Gasoline 0 00 0 377 Life of Tires 22129 RS MAE eek ea es 363 necu ME TRU 51 Lights iier woh a tad oe dane es 97 162 Albag 226293 9 eREPR 70 76 80 97 235 Alarmi reog eg nene aaa u
6. FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE Cartridge Mini er Cartridge Mini is Cavity Puse Fuse Description Cavity Fuse Fuse Description M16 10 Amp Occupant Restraint M20 15 Amp Cabin Compartment Red Controller Occupant Blue Node Interior Light Classification Module CCN INT LIGHT ORC OCM Switch Bank SW M17 15 Amp Left Tail License Park BANK Steering Con Blue Lamp LI TAIL LIC trol Module SCM PRK LMP M21 20 Amp Auto Shut Down ASD M18 15 Amp Right Tail Park Run Yellow _ 3 Blue Lamp RT TAIL PRK M22 10 Amp Right Horn RT HORN RUN LMP Red HI LOW M19 25 Amp Auto Shut Down ASD M23 10 Amp Left Horn LT HORN Natural 1 and 2 Red HI LOW M24 25 Amp Rear Wiper REAR Natural WIPER 478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE Cartridge Mini er Cartridge Mini Cavity Puse Fuse Description Cavity Fuse Fuse Description M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump FUEL M29 10 Amp Occupant Classification Yellow PUMP Diesel Lift Red Module OCM Pump DSL LIFT M30 15 Amp Rear Wiper Module RR PUMP Export Only Blue WIPER MOD Power M26 10 Amp Power Mirror Switch Folding Mirror PWR Red PWR MIRR SW FOLD MIR Driver Window Switch M31 20 Amp
7. 265 List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play woe dase Shag eases je Y dx e 267 Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play esc noosus ce RE Ea eer 267 ll Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack ea casa masaa gns 270 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 270 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play lll Sales Code REN Multimedia System If Equipped zie denied Soie PE ed ease Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Hf Equipped isi racer eee ri diiss Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Clock Setting Procedure ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 H Sales Code RER Multimedia System If Operating Instructions Satellite Mode 291 Equipped xai peer ERR Re 285 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone Operating Instructions Satellite Radio 286 I6 Equipped coca edi eoe deae 293 Operating Instructions Hands Free Operating Instructions Video Entertainment Communicatio
8. NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles CHAngE OIL will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 497 NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change
9. NOTE The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this infor mation The TPMS Warning Lamp will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on sold when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat provid ing the system fault still exists The TPMS Warning Lamp will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur with any of the following sce narios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 372 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of excessive snow and or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors NOTE 1 The compact spare tire if quipped does not have a TPMS sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will turn on 3 After driving for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
10. When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language Phonebook Download UConnect allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the PHONE button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phone book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the UConnect system and then send th
11. 0 0 0 ee 367 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 96 HO 528 INDEX MM Safety Checks Outside Vehide 97 Safety Defects Reporting llle 508 Safety Exhaust Gas 55 Safety Information Tire 0 348 Dalety TIPS tains anc ca tate caua esate hela den 96 Satellite Radio 282 283 285 286 289 298 Satellite Radio Antenna ills 290 Schedule Maintenance sess 496 Seat Belt Maintenance 0 000000 0 ee 472 Seat Belt Reminder lesen 67 SeatBelt me RR alten Sak sarees 58 Adjustable Shoulder Belt 65 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 65 And Pregnant Women 004 68 Child Resttaint es 21 3 o3 scc eae LA 84 86 Extend o5 u rasa e dedi d are dnte d P aoe 6 68 Front Seat ergoe ERE a atah Be te sed 60 Pretensioners u ida dome RE RU de C n 66 Rear Seat ducta d pibe dere ens 60 CALS uon me oat Muta d a aedes aer 133 Adjustment 29 eere ew ea 134 Cleaning zoe hg a whe aaa PW epe 470 Easy Entry llle 149 Fold in Floor Stow n Go isses 140 H ated ue se RR eb Ree Ri hes 136 Lumbar Support c cericcrsrsericesisss 139 MEMO ane terea bara eo mes e es oi eben 157 POWOL 43 63am fale lowes Le UOS 135 Reclining csse emm EE ERU 138 Stow n Go Fold in Floor 140 TIGNE xix mem eee xe ew 149 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 Selection o
12. 06 Set the mode control to ub and turn on el eet 66 46 to keep windows clear Set the mode control to the P position If windshield Cold Weather fogging starts to occur move the control towards the We position 8000cb71 A C AIR FILTER IF EQUIPPED On vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Con trol ATC the climate control system filters out dust and pollen from the air Refer to section 7 Air Conditioning for filter replacement instructions ELECTRIC REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER IF EQUIPPED G Press this button located on your front climate control to turn on the rear window defroster and the optional heated mirrors A light will show that the defroster is on The defroster automatically turns off after about ten minutes of operation as long as the ignition switch is in the RUN position After the initial time interval has expired if the rear window defogger switch is pressed to the on position again during the same ignition cycle the system will automatically turn off after about five minutes es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 NOTE You may turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime by pressing the rear window defogger switch a second time CAUTION To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the rear window defroster do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Labels can be peeled off after soaking with
13. 238 239 246 Exterior Folding 000000 105 Oil Change Indicator Reset 238 239 246 MEMON x cu oye sch EROR EU ohne ee eae c 157 Oil Engine ss cae ee Cete des 440 493 Outside euren ces pets nui deos Sor dad 104 Capacity meotannana E sod e adeat an 491 ReatrVvieW soa age et ev weet T eei e 103 Change Interval 0 00 0000 441 Vanity coa cus stas Sa eoe at aie ny a alle nd ded 106 Checking 422ac4esam o ex Rr RES 440 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Disposal x 6 2 cage ead peia E ERES ER 443 Monitor Tire Pressure System 368 Fiter nace d de a t aed Re b eas 443 493 Mopar Parts seitsme gropi uhei eee 439 508 Filter Disposal 1 0 0 0 0c pe eee 443 MPS Playet its seid oe ted te ee denm 282 285 Identification Logo 2i sk been 442 Multi Function Control Lever LL 169 Materials Added to 0 00000 eee 443 Recommendation 441 491 Navigation Radio scs ke kac tnn aeris 285 Synthetic sa bess ca alin eg e Ree de i EIU nad 443 Navigation System ccc s eseseas eee ea pes 285 VISCOSILY e ceca Sd SG GEAR ritenere si 442 491 New Vehicle Break In Period 95 Onboard Diagnostic System 436 437 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 187 HO 526 INDEX ee Outside Rearview Mirrors 103 104 Overdie uiae ee ed A odi te aet dy 334 Overhead Console llle 184 Overhead Tr
14. Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole is centered on the winch hole Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing down ward on the console with slight pressure reinstall the cover plug Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 WARNING In an accident serious injury could result if the removable floor console is not properly installed Always be sure the removable floor console is fully latched PREMIUM CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED The three compartment console with sliding storage bin sliding upper tray with storage and large console storage bin offers multiple configurations e Four Cup Holders with dishwasher safe liners for cleaning The cup holders can accept plastic bottles large cups or mugs with handles e Top Tray Storage e Upper Storage Bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin CD s or other items Large Console Center Storage will store headphones for the available rear DVD entertainment system or other items 12 volt DC Power Outlet provides continuous power inside the console for cell phones or other electronics Rear Occupant Accessible Multiple Adjustments Removable from vehicle for additional floor space 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M both cavities can easily be removed for cleaning The cup holders will also accommodate large size cups and 20 oz 6 L bottles Position 1 shows the con
15. If Equipped Stow N Go Seating If Equipped Easy Access Seating Swivel N Go Premium Seating If Equipped Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks ll Driver Memory Seat System If Equipped 135 135 136 138 139 140 149 150 157 olde UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE Transmitter To Memory sec ecce sessa cias 158 Memory Position Recall 159 To Disable A Transmitter Linked To Memory 160 ll To Open And Close The Hood 160 Hood Safety Switch If Equipped 162 qb Tc 162 Interior Lights 525a Re ERE es 163 Exterior Lights 2262444050 cee 84 Re 165 B Multifunction Levert s06 bes ern 169 Tun Signals ky dink goa Se yy ores Urt ae 169 Headlight Low High Beam Selector Switch 170 Flash To Pass Optical Horn ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Windshield Wiper And Washer 171 B Tilt Steering Column If Equipped 173 ll Rear Park Assist System If Equipped 174 Rear Park Assist Sensors 175 Bl Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 179 H Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 181 To Activates asean oe Re rg PRA wes 181 To Set At A Desired Speed 182 To Deactivat
16. If the transaxle is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid FRONT AND REAR WHEEL BEARINGS Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed No regular maintenance is required for these compo nents APPEARANCE CARE AND PROTECTION FROM CORROSION Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Roa
17. This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e System Status display e Vehicle information warning message displays e Tire Pressure Monitor System Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features e Compass display Outside temperature display Trip computer functions e Audio Modes display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Steering Wheel EVIC Compass Temp Control Button as it appears on the right side of the steering column EVIC Menu Step Control Button as it appears on the left side of the steering column 81c27d73 81c27d71 Press and release the MENU button and the Press and release the C T button to for instant mm mode displayed will change between OD access to the Compass Temperature Screens Compass Temperature Trip System Status and Personal Settings Press the STEP button to scroll through sub v menus i e Trip Functions Avg Fuel Economy gt DTE Elapsed Time and Units Press this button to RESET Trip Functions and Change Personal Settings 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Liftgate Ajar chime will sound when vehicle starts moving e Hood Ajar If equipped with hood switch Chec
18. e After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers poweroutlel cameause damage vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SUN SCREENS IF EQUIPPED Sun Screens are available for second and third Row Seating Windows The screens store in the sill trim panels and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks that the Sun Screen attaches to when pulled out Ok Sun Screen Retracted Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the top of the window Sun Screen Attaching To Retainer Clips Once the screen is completely to the top of the window extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks attached to the top of the window ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 CONVENIENCE TRAY DRAWER AND CUP HOLDERS There are nine cupholders in the interior Two cup holders in the center front instrument panel four
19. 2 into the light unit socket and turn clockwise to lock into the light unit 5 Install the electrical connector to the bulb and lock the red lock tab 1 6 Connect the battery negative cable Changing the Side Marker Light NOTE Access is somewhat limited You may have to remove the inner fender well or remove the headlight assembly in necessary 80a6b3bb Marker Light 2 Socket 1 Bulb 1 Disconnect the negative battery cable 2 Remove the inner fender well and or headlight as sembly if necessary 3 Twist socket clockwise on the drivers side and counter clockwise on the passenger side and remove 4 Pull bulb from socket 5 Push the replacement bulb into the socket 6 Twist socket into headlight assembly 7 Reassemble and then reconnect battery negative cable Fog Lights NOTE Access to the fog light bulb is from the rear of the fascia On the left rear side of the fascia remove the push pin and lower the hinged access door on the air dam 1 Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable 2 From behind the bumper fascia or the access panel on the air dam twist bulb 1 counter clockwise and remove bulb MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485 SES Mp dg 81c94324 Front Fog Light Bulb Replacement 1 Fog Light Socket 486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If th
20. 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil dren LATCH later in this section The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg but are less than one year old ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Rearward facing child seats and infant carriers must NEVER be used while the second row Swivel n Go seats are in the rearward facing position WARNING Never place any child seat or infant carrier in the Swivel n Go seat while it is in the rearward facing position The swivel seat should be locked in the forward position when using any child seat or infant carriers with the vehicle in motion Failure to do so could res
21. Back Up Lamps B U DRVR WIND SW Yellow LAMPS M27 10 Amp Ignition Switch IGN M32 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Con Red SW Window Module Red troller ORC TT EU WIN MOD ROPE M28 10 Amp Next Generation Con M33 10 Amp Next Generation Con Red troller NGC Transmis Red troller NGC Global sion Feed TRANS Powertrain Engine Con FEED J1962 troller GPEC ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479 FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE Cartridge Mini gs Cartridge Mini T Cavity n Fuse Description Cavity Pu Fuse Description M34 10 Amp Park Assist PRK ASST M37 10 Amp Anti Lock Brake System Red Heater Ventilation Air Red ABS Electronic Stabil Conditioning Module ity Program ESP Stop HVAC MOD Head Lamp Switch STP LP lamp Wash HDLP SW Fuel Pump Rly Hi WASH Compass Control COMPAS M38 25 Amp Lock Unlock Motors M35 10 Amp Heated Mirrors Natural LOCK UNLOCK Red MTRS M36 20 Amp Power Outlet 3 BATT Yellow 480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e When installing the Integrated Power Module cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module and possibly result in a electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is i
22. Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you 348 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION TIRE MARKINGS SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD MAXIMUM SIZE DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY Ds AND STANDARDS a TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES TIN 811b44e8 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that a
23. Front DEFROST 5 SYNC Indicator 13 RECIRCULATE 6 A C On when lit 14 Blower 7 Right Front Temp 15 SYNC 8 MODE 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Below the automatic control the system selects the appropriate mode airflow outlets and fan speed 81c3adf2 Front Lower ATC Panel 1 Blower 4 Rear HVAC Lock 2 Rear Temp On Off 5 Rear DEFROST 3 Rear Mode Operation of the system is quite simple 1 Press the AUTO button and the word AUTO will illuminate in the front ATC display along with three temperatures for Driver s Passenger and Rear seats The system will then automatically regulate the amount of airflow 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver s passenger and rear seat rotary temperature knobs Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 NOTE e Itis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric by selecting the US M cus
24. Lower the jack to its fully closed position WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately 13 Place the deflated flat tire and compact spare tire cover assembly in the rear cargo area Do not stow the deflated tire in the spare tire location Have the full sized tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible 14 Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the vehicle Reassemble the winch handle extensions to form a T and fit the winch T handle over the drive nut Rotate the nut to the right until the winch mechanism clicks at least three times 15 Stow the jack jack handle and winch handle tools m 16 Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as possible Correct pressure as required Wheel Nuts All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated This is especially important during the first few hundred miles 422 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME of operation and after each time a tire is changed to allow the wheel nuts to become properly set All nuts should first be firmly seated against the wheel The nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque Tighten the nuts to final torque in incre
25. Radial Ply Tires 0 0 eee eee 360 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 455 457 Radio Broadcast Signals 04 253 Radio Navigation 0 000000 0a ee 285 Radio Operation 0 283 286 300 Radio Remote Controls 0 000005 300 Radio Satellite 282 283 285 286 289 298 Radio Sound Systems 282 285 Rear Air Conditioning 308 315 Rear Heater llle 308 Rear Park Sense System 000000 174 Rear Window Defroster llle 320 Rearview Mirrors 00000 eee eee 103 Reclining Front Seats 0 0 0 0 000 138 Recorder Event Data 0 0 00 cece ee 81 Recreational Towing 000 407 429 Reminder Seat Belt 0 0 00 000 eee eee 67 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 22 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 300 Remote Starting System llis 28 Removable Floor Console 208214 Replacement Keys 0 00000 cece 16 Replacement Parts llle 439 Replacement Tires 0 000000 cee 363 Reporting Safety Defects 00 508 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 238 239 246 Restraint Head illl 135 Restraints Child 435 4 caeterae amp bie ead 84 91 Restraints Infant 0 0 0 eee 84 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 427 Roof Rack Luggage Rack 216 Rotation Tires 2
26. Red Yellow Vehicle Entertainment M5 25 Amp Inverter System IOD VES Sat Natural ellite Digital Audio Re E ceiver SDARS DVD MD a Hands Free Module HFM Universal Ga M7 20 Amp Power Outlet 2 BATT rage Door Opener M8 20 Amp Front Heated Seat If VANITY LP Yellow Equipped MH 10 Amp Ignition Off Draw M9 20 Amp Rear Heated Seat If Red IOD HVAC ATC MW Yellow Equipped SENSR Underhood Lamp UH LMP M12 30 Amp Amplifier AMP Green 476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE Cartridge Mini za Cartridge Mini cg Cavity eee Fuse Description Cavity Pu Fuse Description M13 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw M15 20 Amp COL MOD IR SNS Yellow Cabin Compartment Yellow Heater Ventilation Air Node IOD CCN Wire Conditioning less Control Module Automatic Temperature WCM SIREN Clock Control HVAC ATC Module CLK MOD Rear View Mirror RR Multi Function Control VW MIR Cabin Com Switch MULTIFCTN partment Node CCN SW Transfer Case Switch M14 20 Amp Trailer Tow Export T CASE SW RUN ST Yellow Only Multi Function Control Switch MULTIFTCN SW Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Glow Plug Module GLW PLG MOD Export Diesel Only ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477
27. To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the PHONE button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the PHONE button to place the current call on
28. To stop the SCAN mode and start playing the desired track press the SCAN button again During the SCAN mode you can also press the SEEK button to the left or right to go to the previous or next tracks RND Random Button RES Radios Only Pressing the RND button will switch between the shuffle on and shuffle off modes of the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is on List or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the following buttons will take you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod device TUNE SCROLL Knob In the List mode the TUNE SCROLL knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod Turning the TUNE SCROLL knob clockwise forward and counterclockwise backward scrolls through lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE SCROLL knob to select and start playing the track By turning the TUNE SCROLL knob fast you can jump through the list faster During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 During all List modes the iPod will display all lists in wrap around mode So if the track you wish to select is at the bottom of the list you just turn the TUNE SCROLL knob backward counterclockwise
29. Trailer Towing Guide 0 00 396 Trailer Weight sce Rees 396 Transaxle sic0 cack sore pac Er ERTES ENAR 329 Automatie 22229 Ga a Gea wie cae he 329 Operation uasa Xe dr dq e die es 329 Overdrive 4 lcu pd xeu ga Rh 334 Selection of Lubricant 463 494 Transmission es says aso pia Re BUE CR RU 463 Automatic 2 322993 e RR RE eR eles 463 PIU 22a cu eR ttes 463 494 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 004 27 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 187 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 22 Transporting Pets cie eere RR pes 91 Tread Wear Indicators llle 362 Trip Computer sais cce 25 eere knew 4 240 HO 532 INDEX ME Tup Odometet seses scan nae Re oe eee 238 Turn Signals esac caw RR rm 169 231 483 486 UCI Connector i21ss4ilk cti de Rex exis 293 UConnect Hands Free Phone 107 285 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 510 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 293 Universal Joints llle 452 Universal Serial Bus USB Port 282 285 Universal Transmitter 0 0005 187 Unleaded Gasoline llle 377 Upholstery Care 1 eee 469 USB Port 2 44 bade eee dae anys 282 285 Vanity Minors seese beta ea XE eee es 106 Variance Compass 0 000000 eee 242 249 Vehicle Certification Label 388 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle
30. evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Trailer Tongue Weight TW The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle This type of hitch is the most popular on the market today and is commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used 394 STARTING AND OPERATING ME for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the tra
31. next to the driver 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened from the outside door handle or the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door when the child protection locks are engaged To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock 1 Open the sliding side door 2 Slide the child lock control outward away from the vehicle to disengage the Child Protection Door Lock 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door if equipped ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 NOTE e After setting the child protection door lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e The power sliding side door switches will not operate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h e The power sliding door will operate from the outside door handle the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter the switches on the overhead console or the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door when the gear selector lever is in PARK regardless of the child lock lever position LIFTGATE On vehicles equipped with power locks the liftgate can be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter button or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front
32. package content 396 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The Trailer Hitch Classification chart provides the indus try standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATIONS Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium Duty 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Duty NOTE All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS The Trailer Towing Weights Chart provides the maxi mum trailer weight ratings towable for a given driv etrain ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS Engine Transmission GCWR Gross Com bined Wt Rating Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt 3 8L amp 4 0L Auto matic 7 000 Ibs 3 175 kg 22 sq ft 2 0 sq m Up to 2 persons amp Luggage 1 800 lbs 816 kg 180 Ibs 82 kg 7 000 Ibs 3 175 kg 22 sq ft 2 0 sq m 3 to 5 persons amp Luggage 1 350 Ibs 612 kg 135 Ibs 61 kg 7 000 Ibs 3 175 kg 22 sq ft 2 0 sq m 6 to 7 persons amp Luggage 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg
33. permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the electrical cord to a standard 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver s side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module WARNING Remember to disconnect the electrical cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 volt electrical cord could cause electrocution AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The electronically controlled transmission provides a mm precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift the gear selector lever into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift the gear selector lever from RE VERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting the gear selector lever into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal WARNING It is dangerous to shift the gear selector le
34. recti ee rune Pes 442 Oil Filter Disposal Jesse 443 Oil Selection llle 441 491 Oil Synthetle usw trace ce aod ne ee eee 443 Operation see ye trend rte afa E e CU AR 95 Ov rh ating ces Sca I RR Oe OR E 410 SLaTHDg cesi odas de dda de e 326 Temperature Gauge isses mace ras 235 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 77 Event Data Recorder lees 81 Exhaust Gas Caution 55 96 381 447 Exhaust System ceri casse eee eee 446 Extender Seat Belt llle 68 Exterior Folding Mirrors liess 105 Fabric Care oo 2ecuels RR PES 469 470 Filler Location Fuel llle 240 Filters Air Cleaner llle 444 Air Conditioning lees 320 450 Engine Oll i i eg der aes detis 443 493 Engine Oil Disposal 200 443 Flashers Hazard Warning Lm ev i 410 HO 520 INDEX M Tutti Signal soe eta xot Rees 231 483 486 Flash T0 Pass 545 aere esce 173 Flat Tire StOWage seecra ck aeree Baa as 421 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range i coss e kn 386 Engine Oil iis ego kb Ress dos 386 Fuel Requirements 0 383 385 Maintenance 4cs e b de picaria iida 387 Replacement Parts 386 Stat ng ies s reos a RR RE a ed 386 Flooded Engine Starting 0 328 Floor Console ees 203 Fluid Capacities ecese sebbene anisses 491 Fluid Leaks 0 reaks ea ea eee 97 Fluid Level Checks Automatic
35. switch is first turned ON If the light is not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible 21 Temperature Gauge E The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem SET perature Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operat ing satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call your autho rized dealership for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cool ing System Pressure Cap paragraph 22 TriplOdometer Display Reset Button Base Cluster
36. to get to the track faster Radio Preset Buttons In the List mode the radio preset buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod device e 1 Playlists e 2 Artists e 3 Albums e 4 Genres e 5 Audiobooks e 6 Podcasts After pressing a preset button you will see the list you are in on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To exit the List mode without selecting a track press the same preset button again to go back to Play mode LIST Button Pressing the LIST button will take to the top level menu of the iPod This takes you to the same top level menu as on your iPod Turn the TUNE SCROLL knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and then press the TUNE SCROLL knob This will take you to the next sub menu list item of the iPod and you can follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE Button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV IF EQUIPPED Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting technology to provide streaming video coast to coast The subscription service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio SIRIUS Backseat TV offers three video channels for family entertainment directly from its satellites and broadcasting studio
37. 26 ene 452 Steering Linkage 000005 452 Drive Shaft Universal Joints 452 Body Lubrication 0 0 0000 453 Windshield Wiper Blades 453 Cooling System 6 6 eee e 454 Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 459 Fuel System Connections 460 Brakes uet oh ee eR ae D RS 460 Automatic Transaxle 00 5 463 Front And Rear Wheel Bearings 466 Appearance Care And Protection From COEL OSIOD xz bee grep Boe HE aS 466 Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cup Holders 472 ll Fuses Totally Integrated Power Module 473 W Vehicle Storage 2 9 998 480 Bl Replacement Light Bulbs 481 W Bulb Replacement aci wich nC ORC CORO 482 Headlights x07 usb y wt Moe Ex as 482 Front Park Turn Signal And Side Marker Lights ize e 39e xa ees 483 Fog Lights ss s esee y x eo ded 485 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal Side Marker And Backup Lights llle 486 Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL 488 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 License Light 24 0 asa neha RR RR Rm 489 Engines ak aes ae oa AO a ae 493 B Fluids And Capacities icr en 491 Chasis osi pU XO Ra RUE senna ieas s 494 Bi Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 493 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 8L ENGINE COMPARTMENT POWER STEERING FLUID FUSES TOTAL A
38. A Flat Tire qorusan r i e 412 Chart Tire Sizing i eser ea 349 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 235 437 Child Restraint ios up EA grew 84 86 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 88 Child Safety Locks 00000 33 49 Child Seat i222 Ee tds rie ooo aw 2 ed 91 Clean Air Gasoline 0 0 0 eee ee 378 Cleaning Wheels ssrin e e aoc di eee wea a 468 Climate Control 2222244 hinds ei PRU 302 Clock apiece exe SS ces 256 271 283 287 Coat Hook ugue e ced Oh e ne 215 en INDEX 517 Com Holder widest rase dee we Mae eae wea aS 203 Cold Weather Operation 00 327 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 301 Compact Spare Tir si sisit eg piiat ta ahi 360 Compass sccca cee enis ceva genes 240 243 248 Compass Calibration 0 243 249 Compass Variance llis 242 249 Computer Trip Travel 0 0 00 247 Connector UCT 408 4 diet shah s ea aat tra WR aci ae eas 293 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 293 Console speda marengi imdi ER eR eed 203 Console Floor selle 203 Console Overhead eee es 184 Console Removable 208 214 Contract Service ees 507 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 457 Cooling System coke RR RE RR 454 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 456 Coolant Capacity eee eee 491 Coolant Level 0 0 0 0 0002 cee 45
39. CARA 444 Body Mechanism Lubrication 453 B Pillar Location 6 bee I 352 Brake Assist System 0 00000000 eirs 341 Brake Control System Electronic 339 Brake Fluid socs e betwee Pet eae PR 494 brake Parking ose ob SoA HS SR eS 334 Brake System 4 asy RCM eb A kusas 336 460 Ariti Lock ABS uer ae exact Ao end 337 Fluid Check ss petetas ode ad neia 461 lh m 460 Warning Light 516 INDEX a Brakes serran RR DUE Sonar ae Bsn eae 336 460 Brake Transmission Interlock 330 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 95 Bulb Replacement 00000050 482 Bulbs Light essai enri RR 481 Calibration Compass 000 243 249 Capacities Fluid 0 0 00 00050 491 Caps Filler UGH os seen ahaa nese ee ah ahaa tes ante a A CH ae ER as 381 Oil Engine i re wv ee bea e era es 442 Radiator Coolant Pressure 457 Car Washes pi 4 024 e400 RR n 467 Carbon Monoxide Warning 381 Cargo Compartment Luggage Cartier sei sacra tava eed aeris 216 Cargo Vehicle Loading siis 216 Catalytic Converter sse eR RES 445 Caution Exhaust Gas 0 55 96 381 CD Compact Disc Player 282 285 CD Compact Disc Player Maintenance 301 Cellular Phone 107 285 286 300 Center High Mounted Stop Light 488 Chains lire acude cae RR PGA EEG 365 Changing
40. Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 los TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 811a4d11 356 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING 1 Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure WARNING Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 WARNING Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems You could lose control of your vehicle Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive w
41. Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment and the vehicle communication network intact and the power intact the Enhanced Accident Response System performs the following functions e Cuts off fuel to the engine e Flashes hazard lights e Turns on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlocks the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC detect a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the driver front passenger and rear passengers and then immediately deflate 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blist
42. HOOD RELEASE LOWERAIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK WASHER FLUID LEVEL OUTLET A WINDOW DOWN CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM Hi 3 2005 Ot any M awp srake WINDSHIELD LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS REARFOGLANP AND LIFTGATE DEFROSTAND VENTILATINGFAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOURWHEEL WARNING PARKING DEFROST HEATED OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE as m rria X9 mb 3l i ae TOW LJ HAUL VOICE BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTUMENT PANEL SEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK AIRCONDITIONING __ CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARNING TOW HAUL CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON C8 F er 2 i OR 60 pr tr3 Low LOWER ANCHORS GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG SLIDINGDOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER ANDTETHERFOR UGONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL STEERING FLUID AND WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE Low C ES d a mw bo i MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNER S 8191e970 INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL ISO Li 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not rea
43. If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Don t leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Each vehicle except commercial cargo vehicles is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Two LATCH child restraint anchor age systems are installed on all second row seats and in the center position on all 3rd row fold in floor seats Second row seats also feature tether strap anchorages located in the rear surface of the seatback In addition all third row fold in floor seats are equipped with a child restraint tether anchor at the center seating position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 LATCH Anchorages When using the tether anchorages in the outboard seat ing positions ensure that the strap is routed underneath the top of the seatback and the head restraint 81ce919a Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting When using the tether anchorages in the center position on third row fold in floor se
44. Light The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is combined with BAS The ESP BAS Warning light and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warn ing Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active this is normal The sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation 344 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is inte
45. Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 12 Vehicle Theft Alarm Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi mately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until vehicle is disarmed 13 Anti Lock Brake System Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake Sys s tem The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as
46. Phones The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice Recogni tion button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the UConnect system Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the Voice Recognition button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UConnect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to
47. Power Window 5 Power Door 3 Manual Lock 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M MANUAL RECLINING SEATS IF EQUIPPED The recliner mechanism control is on the outboard side of the seat To recline lean forward slightly lift the lever then push back to the desired position and release the lever Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position Using body pressure lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched 81bd164a Manual Reclining Seat Control es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked MANUAL LUMBAR LEVER IF EQUIPPED The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the outboard side of the seat To increase the support rotate the handle i down To decrease the support rotate the handle up Manual Lumbar Control wards 81bd1649 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M STOW N GO SEATING IF EQUIPPED On vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating the second and third row seats may be folded into the floor for convenient storage To Fold Second Row Seats 1 Lower the head restraints and raise the armrests on the second row seat 2 Slide the storage bin
48. To reset a trip odometer display the trip odometer to be reset then push and hold the button until the display resets approximately two seconds The odometer must be in TRIP mode to reset it es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 To reset a message display gATE gASCAP noFUSE Change Oil Required LoCOOL LoWASH push and hold the button until the display resets approximately two seconds TriplOdometer Display Reset Button Premium Cluster Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of two trip odometer settings The letter A or B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 mi km The odometer must be in TRIP mode to reset it 23 Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transaxle gear selection NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK 24 Odometer Display Area When the appropriate conditions exist the following odometer messages will display CHAngE OIL sse Oil Change Required CRUISE pe ensani ce Cruise Control On dOOf cruise or SEAM Ea bebes ds Ps Door Ajar ESPOEE cot pesarese RE RAE EAE ats ESP Off SATE kx sey b bee EAS RE A Lift Gate Ajar BASCAP uasa eas eee RR Race Fuel Cap Fault hogd cess ste Meee eee Ewe RAP EE Hood Ajar NOFUSE sos ie ee he e Fuse Fault LoCOOL e M RR ERR Low Coolant LoWASH gebe Low Washer Fluid NOTE Some of the above war
49. Towing Assistance Card Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service cen ter menu structure and to leave a numbe
50. Transaxle lille 464 Automatic Transmission 464 Brake sese Spa ee ee aid 461 Power Steering acacia sae eae eh aed aes 451 Fid S se neea ach cro e rer eta E Rd d 493 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 493 Fog Light Service tae asl Re Rr EARS 485 Fog Lights 2c 168 234 485 Fold in Floor Stow n Go Seating 140 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 05 427 Fuel seats ck peeled eee doo tena aga wes 377 Adding i ccc ot cad cus e woke E REC Eee 381 Additives s cs Re ciri pinsa eee ER ES 379 Clean Alt 2c cde ae ay ea RR ES AS 378 Filler Cap Gas Cap 0 000 240 381 Filler Door Gas Cap serre teges sparnenis 240 Gasoline 4222294 99d R RE ERR 377 Gauge xu see dace usd Rd Rae Rl RR and 228 FOSES LC Cm 460 n PER 228 Octane Rating 4 2 iia id Poa ey E dae ds 493 Requirements i esce e aces eO ee s 377 491 System HOSES issu ene Rao s e e 460 en INDEX 521 Tank Capacity sacs cna meer me 491 Fuel Flexible See Flexible Fuel Vehicles Fuel System Caution seepra sisaan rya a msaa 380 E ling esee c aenn phe bh PES 381 FUSeS 2zcaug Gm wx Oa cea E a E EXUEGUR NUN 473 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 187 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 381 383 Gasoline Clean Air llle 378 Gasoline Euel ates dit ave RE et 377 Gasoline Reformulated sss 378 Gauges Coolant Temperature llle sti 235 Eel 5 rah a
51. US or METRIC appears RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION RADIO BROADCAST SIGNALS Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals 1 AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmit ted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary 2 FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE The radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and six disc CD DVD changer if equipped will remain active for up to 90 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned OFF depending upon the AC CESSORY DELAY setti
52. and will disengage automatically when the engine begins running Ignition Key Removal Place the selector lever in PARK Turn the ignition key to the OFF position and then remove the key NOTE The power window switches radio power outlets and removable console if equipped will remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature WARNING NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door with the integrated ignition key in the ignition a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the integrated ignition key is placed in the OFF or ACC position SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is lo
53. are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances 404 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring Wherever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a four pin or a seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following four pin connector and seven pin connector illustrations RIGHT STOP TURN T LE
54. can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Latch Plate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you hear a click i p m P UR ED MESES l mE E m E p ID e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Latch Plate To Buckle 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up WARNING on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt internal injury in a collision The belt f
55. continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change opera tion only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is o
56. could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly de pending on its size and shape giving a false indica tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e To avoid vehicle damage the Rear Park Assist System should only be used as a parking aid and is unable to recognize every obstacle including small objects Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Rear Park Assist System to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver look over his her shoulder when using the Rear Park Assist System NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the system operating properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of the system Enabling and Disassembling The Rear Park Assist System There are times when you may want to disable the Rear Park Assist System such as when towing a trailer Vehicles Equipped With the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC You can turn the Rear Park Assist System on or off through the EVIC For details refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information
57. damp cloth a damp cloth with Mopar Total Clean then Mopar Spot amp Stain Remover if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Upholstery Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply Mopar Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and rem
58. doors To open the liftgate depress the liftgate release handle located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 81bc38a8 Liftgate Handle Location If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with the power liftgate feature pressing the button on the RKE transmitter will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the liftgate area POWER LIFTGATE IF EQUIPPED The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using the button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter Press the button on the transmitter twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate When the liftgate is fully open pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by pressing the button located on the overhead console ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 81 bbf7ac Overhead Console Master Power Switch Detail Liftgate Rear Switch 1 Left Door 3 Right Door When the RKE transmitter button is pressed and the 2 Liftgate 4 Master Lock Flash Lights feature is enabled the tail lights will flash to The power liftgate may be closed by pressing the button signal that the liftgate is opening or closing located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening Pushing once w
59. for about 1 mi 1 6 km with the turn signals on a chime will sound to alert the driver HEADLIGHT LOW HIGH BEAM SELECTOR SWITCH Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to HIGH and pull toward yourself normal position to return to LOW beam ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 FLASH TO PASS OPTICAL HORN You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever fully toward your self This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within the Multifunction Lever Rotate the end of the lever to select the desired wiper speed NOTE Always remove any buildup of snow that pre vents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the OFF position If the windshield wiper switch is turned OFF and the blades cannot return to the OFF position damage to the wiper motor may occur 81bcf9d2 Multifunction Lever Features 1 Front Mist Washer 3 Rear Wiper Washer 2 Wiper Speeds 4 Low High Beam and Flash 1 Multifunction Lever Mist Front Wiper and Washer Press the end of the Multifunction Lever inward to the first detent and release to clear the windshield Pressing the Multifunction Lever inward to the second 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x detent will cause the washers to spray for a maximum of
60. gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emission control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you E STARTING AND OPERATING 381 Carbon Monoxide Warnings ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Ca WARNING P eae a As a reminder a fuel icon with an arrow Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the S indicating which side of the vehicle the fuel precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning filler door is located on is located in the e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide instrument cluster just below the Fuel Gage a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the p
61. in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your vehicle Your authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns 508 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ME WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defe
62. ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may Occupants riding in Swivel n Go seating must be not work when you need it wearing their seat belt and the seat must be locked in either the forward or rearward position Failure The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching to do so could result in serious injury or even latch plates which are designed to keep the lap death portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again
63. intervals exceed 6 000 mi 10 000 km or six months whichever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required in Use Factory Settings of the EVIC section in this manual or under Odometer Trip Odometer in the Instrument Cluster Descriptions section of this manual At Each Stop For Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the SAFE or MIN mark M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 498 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if At Each Oil Change required Once A Month e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage CAUTION e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed e Check all light
64. is deactivated WARNING BAS Brake Assist System cannot prevent the natu ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying 342 STARTING AND OPERATING ME the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appr
65. it may cause window fogging VACATION STORAGE Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again WINDOW FOGGING Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy or humid weather To clear the windows select DE FROST or MIX mode and increase the front blower speed Do not use the RECIRCULATION mode without A C for long periods as fogging may occur OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M OPERATING TIPS WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS Hot weather and gt o 5 TAA Set the mode control to vehicle interior is very d hot on and blower on high Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out NL the hot air Once comfort is achieved adjust controls for comfort Turn ro on and set the mode control to the Warm weather her a position gt e Cool Sunny Operate in P position Cool amp Humid conditions
66. lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink channels Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety stan dards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance 81cb44fe HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death PROGRAMMING HOMELINK Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that
67. list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 511 All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart signifi cantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differ
68. lower right side of your radio faceplate C RND SINGLE DISC MP3 PUSHON PUSH AUDIO SELECT Q TUNE SCROLL 81c7c564 RES Radio Non Satellite Model Shown With Satellite Similar Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM or FM frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To s
69. marker light can be changed from the rear of the headlight housing You may be able to change the bulbs from behind the headlight without removing the assembly 1 Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable 2 Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlight unit 3 Remove wiring connector from bulb 4 Rotate headlight bulb counter clockwise NOTE On some vehicles it may be necessary to slide the red release lock rearward and push forward on the connector while depressing the release tab CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 5 Pull headlight bulb and remove from headlight unit 6 Install headlight bulb to the headlight unit 7 Rotate bulb clockwise to lock bulb in headlight unit 8 Connect wiring connector to bulb and slide red latch lock forward 9 Connect the battery negative cable Front Park Turn Signal and Side Marker Lights Changing the Park Turn Signal Light 1 Disconnect the negative battery cable 2 Release the lock tab 1 on the connector and remove the connector from the bulb 3 Twist the socket 2 counterclockwise and remove from the light assembly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483 81c9ce29 Turn Signal Bulb Change 1 Red Lock Tab 2 Turn Signal Socket 484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4 Insert the bulb
70. method of towing is with a flat bed truck TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Towing With The Ignition Key Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi tions The gear selector lever must be in NEUTRAL the distance to be traveled must not exceed 100 mi 160 km and the towing speed must not exceed 44 mph 72 km h Exceeding these towing limits may cause a trans mission geartrain failure If the transmission is not op erative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 100 mi 160 km the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels off the ground e Do not tow the vehicle from the rear Damage to the rear sheet metal liftgate and fascia will occur ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 429 CAUTION e Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result e If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the OFF position not in the LOCK or ACC positions If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed wipers defrosters etc the key must be in the ON position not the ACC position Make certain the trans mission remains in NEUTRAL Towing Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only ap proved method of towing with out the ignition key is with a flat bed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle T
71. of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the i rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some Any procedure other than above could result in e Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 of immobilized vehicle pin y mph 55 km h when you are stuck And don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift the gear selector lever back and forth between REVERSE and DRIVE Usually the least 428 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast e Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment Damage to the front fascia will result may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h e Always use wheel lift equipment when towing from the front The only other approved
72. pockets for storage 81bb8b89 Glove Compartment Features 1 Upper Door 3 Lower Latch Lock 2 Upper Latch 4 Lower Door Lower Glove Compartment 81bd58c4 To open the lower compartment 4 pull out on the Front Door Storage Features release handle 3 The lower compartment handle is also 1 Storage Pocket 3 Bottle Holder equipped with a lock 3 2 Rear Map Pocket 4 Front Map Pocket es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 Sliding Side Door Bottle Holder DRIVER SEATBACK STORAGE IF EQUIPPED Both sliding doors have a bottle holder molded right into The Driver s Seat Back has a Primary Storage Pocket on the trim all models and an optional Secondary Mesh Pocket 81bd58c1 Sliding Door Bottle Holder Driver s Back Seat Features 1 Standard Pocket 4 Bottle Holder 2 Mesh Pocket 5 Side Mesh Pocket 3 Bag Holder 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SECOND ROW SEAT FLOOR STORAGE BINS IF EQUIPPED The Second Row Seat Storage Bins are located on the floor in front of the second row seats The area below the floor covers can be used for storage when the second row seat is in the upright position Storage Bin Cover Lock Release Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the Unlocked position to allow greater access to the storage bin CAUTION The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to avo
73. radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT RE MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill The system should be drained flushed and refilled at the intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 of this manual If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old antifreeze solution Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended coolant refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct coolant type 456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Mixing of coolants other than specified Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolants may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT coolant is intro duced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine coolant antifreeze products Do no
74. reading on these engines MIN OIL MARK MAX OIL MARK 809744ab Engine Oil Dipstick CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441 Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for information on this system NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 7 442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 3 amp 3 8 Liter Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine
75. remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will automatically update and the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h for the TPMS to receive this information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 373 PREMIUM TPMS WITH EVIC IF EQUIPPED The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important to regularly check and maintain proper tire pressure in all the tires The Premium TPMS consists of the following compo nents e Receiver Module e Four TPMS Sensors e Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various TPMS Messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and graph ics displaying tire pressures e Yellow TPMS Telltale Warning Light TPMS Low Pressure Warnings The TPMS Telltale Warning Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be acti
76. shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transaxle fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Fluid Level Check 3 8L and 4 0L Engines with Six Speed Automatic Transaxles NOTE Your vehicle s transmission may be equipped with a capped dipstick tube it is sealed and should not be tampered with Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly The Six Speed automatic transaxle AutoStick has been equipped with a capped dipstick tube It is sealed and should not be tampered with See you authorized dealer service department if you wish to have the transmission fluid checked Fluid Level Check 3 3L Engine with Four Speed Automatic Transaxle The dipstick is located just behind the radiator lower right side 4 SPEED DIPSTICK EN ADDOS COLD SO OHIO etta 80f34e48 4 Speed ATX Diptstick To properly check the automatic transaxle fluid level the following procedure must be used ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465 1 The vehicle must be on level ground 2 The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60 seconds 3 Fully apply parking brake 4 Place the gear selector lever momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in PARK Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibilit
77. such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune
78. than one quarter full e you do not add less than 5 gal 19 L when refueling e you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least five minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE When the ambient temperature is above 90 F 32 C you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed 386 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles FFV E 85 and Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in Mopar engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting DaimlerChrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufac turer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements devel oped during extensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to DaimlerChrysler Corporation engines Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitati
79. the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 O clock positions The right hand rocker switch has a push button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM or Tape to CD mode depending on which radio is in the vehicle The left hand rocker switch has a push button in the center The function of the left hand switch is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand rocker switch operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand switch will tune to the next pre set station that you have programmed in the radio pre set push button es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 CD Player Pressing the top of the sw
80. the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gage even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Lamp NOTE Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire BASIC TPMS WITHOUT EVIC IF EQUIPPED The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module en STARTING AND OPERATING 371 NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Basic TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Wheel Sensors e TPMS Telltale Warning Light The TPMS Telltale Warning Light will illumi 1 nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure value located on the placard on the driver s side B Pillar The system will automatically update and the TPMS Warning Lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received
81. the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section SECURITY It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the Learn button on the Garage Door Opener mm to complete the training for a Rolling Code Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 3
82. the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting SLIDING SIDE DOOR The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the outside Pull outward on exterior handle to open the sliding door The sliding door inside handle functions by rocking forward and back Rocking the handle back wards opens the door and rocking forward releases the hold open latch in order to close the door E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 To keep your door operating properly observe the fol NOTE The left side sliding door cannot be opened lowing guidelines while the fuel door is open This feature operates only when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the fuel door POWER SLIDING SIDE DOOR IF EQUIPPED The power sliding door may be opened manually or by using the buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry
83. this manual 6 Oil Pressure Warning Light S271 This light shows low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 7 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi Awe tion If the engine is critically hot a continuous UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 chime will sound for four minutes After the chime turns off the engine will still be critically hot until the light turns off 8 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 9 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about one mile with the turn signals on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 10 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light The malfunction lamp for the ESP is combined ESP with BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on when the ignition switch is 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PAN
84. through a door located on the rear of the transmitter Insert a small flat bladed screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the access door BATTERY ACCESS DOOR 81bb1827 Battery Replacement 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Remote Starting conveniently starts the engine from outside the vehicle by using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter while maintaining the Security Alarm System The Remote Starting System has a targeted range of 328 ft 100 m
85. turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to floor and en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411 the fan control to High This allows the heater core to act WARNING asa supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 Maintenance of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back Artem Ereosue Cap paragiaphi into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service 412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING For vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating if it is necessary to retrieve the spare tire from under the JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where i
86. until it is open approximately 12 Hood Release Front View 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M in 30 cm and then drop it This should secure both If the vehicle is equipped with the Compass Mini Trip latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully Computer CMTC and the hood is not latched a hood closed with both latches engaged will be displayed in the PRNDL Odometer window of the instrument cluster WARNING LIGHTS If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when All of the lights except the hazard warning lights the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision headlamp high beams and flash to pass are controlled by You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches switches to the left of the steering column ON the are fully latched before driving instrument panel HOOD SAFETY SWITCH IF EQUIPPED If the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and the hood is not latched the EVIC will display Hood Ajar in the instrument cluster EVIC display window es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 The interior lights will automatically turn OFF in about 10 minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds every activation thereafter until the engine is started if one of the following occur e A door sliding door or the liftgate is left open e Any overhead reading light is left ON e If the dimmer control is in the extreme top p
87. using a seat belt properly the vehicle or being thrown out ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat adjust the seat E belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the WARNING front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go e A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm
88. warm water STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures 2 0 66 cece 326 Traction Control System TCS 339 Automatic Transmission ss 326 W Power Steering 0 00000 0008 Bl Engine Block Heater If Equipped 329 W Driving On Slippery Surfaces Bl Automatic Transmission 000 329 Acceleration i446 6 40 sso ER ke 345 Brake Transmission Interlock System 330 Traction inda dba tt aeai SE E ESSE 345 la Parking Brake ies ep Rm ERROR AQ aes 334 MiDriving Through Water 00 346 ll Brake System 5 Rn 336 Flowing Rising Water 346 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 337 W Tire Safety Information s sse eo n 348 H Electronic Brake Control Systems 339 Tire Markings cete Rech A ei 348 324 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Bl Tires General Information Tire Pressure Bl Tire Chains MSnow Tires 0 0 0 ee B Tire Rotation Mi Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS Basic TPMS Without EVIC If Equipped Premium TPMS With EVIC If Equipped ll Fuel Requirements 3 3L amp 3 8L Gasoline Engine If Equipped Bl Adding Fuel Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 356 356 365 366 367 368 370 973 377 377 381 Loose Fuel Fil
89. 0 km h disabled by performing the following procedure e f the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc 1 Place the key in the ignition switch tions within the same cycle the system will automati cally stop and must be opened or closed manually 2 Cycle the ignition switch ON OFF four times ending in the OFF position Do not start the engine WARNING 3 Within 10 seconds of the final cycle press the hazard switch You or others could be injured if caught in the path i d 4 A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming of the sliding door Make sure the door path is clear before closing the door You can turn the feature back on by repeating the above mentioned procedure 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Power Sliding Side Door Master Lock Switch The power sliding side door may also be opened by pressing the switches on the overhead console or the switch located on the trim panel just in front of the sliding door To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the sliding door locks may be overrid den by pressing ON using the Master Lock Out Switch located in the front overhead console next to the driver 81 bbf7ac Overhead Console Power Sliding Door Master Switch 1 Left Door 3 Right Door 2 Liftgate 4 Master Lock ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 SLIDING SID
90. 10 seconds or until the lever is released and the wipers will cycle three times NOTE If the Multifunction Lever is depressed while in the delay range the wipers will operate for several seconds after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the Multifunction Lever is depressed while in the OFF position the wipers will operate for approximately two wipe cycles then turn OFF 2 Intermittent Low and High Speed Wipers Use the intermittent wipers when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable Rotate the end of the Multifunction Lever to the first detent position then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 20 seconds between cycles to a cycle every 2 seconds The time delay will be doubled if the vehicle speed is less than 10 mph 16 km h Low Speed is achieved by rotating the Multifunction Lever past the intermittent settings to the first detent High Speed is achieved by rotating the Multifunction Lever past the intermittent settings to the second detent 3 Rotary Ring Rear Wiper and Washer Rotating the Rotary Ring to the first detent activates the rear intermit tent wipers To activate the washers rotate the Rotary Ring fully forward and the washers will spray until the ring is released and then resume the intermittent inter val NOT
91. 5 458 Disposal of Used Coolant 457 Drain Flush and Refill Ln 455 Inspeccion 26 chs goon r a ione e Pee em 458 Points to Remember sls 458 Pressure Cap ausit dodo e dre do n 457 Radiator Cap 1 ee eee 457 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 455 491 493 Cruise Control Speed Control 181 Cup Holder se e e eds 201 472 Customer Assistance llle 505 Data Recorder Event llle 81 Daytime Running Lights 166 Dealer Service 0 0 0 eee 439 Defroster Rear Window 320 Defroster Windshield 97 304 314 Diagnostic System Onboard 436 HO 518 INDEX M Digital Video Disc DVD Player 282 285 Dimmer Conttol 32 nce Ret 164 Dimmer Switch Headlight 173 Dipsticks Automatic Transaxle llle 464 Automatic Transmission 464 Oil Engine i222 hate e Ree 440 Disabled Vehicle Towing sess 428 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 457 Engine Oi ora er e abra ve 443 Domelight i d be bt E RRERRRERRRREE 164 Door LOCKS 04a oS he be Qu exa be oO ee 9d 32 Door Locks Automatic 000000008 36 Door Opener Garage acce oe ee si 187 Dive Belts carreras taan Tun E anced 444 Drive Shaft Universal Joints 452 Driving On Slippery Surfaces i e eec eres 345 Through Fl
92. 55 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance GENERAL INFORMATION This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica tions were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof control switch is located in the front overhead console The sunroof panel tilts upward at the rear for ventilation or slides rearward under the roof POWER SUNROOF OPERATION Opening the Sunroof Manually Press the switch rearward and hold and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically During this opera tion any release of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof WARNING In an accident there is greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Alw
93. 65 Changing c ca ices 9 e rk c ex kn 412 Compact Spare s Re E e es 360 Flat Changing cesi une xe RA Bek 421 General Information llle 356 High Speed 24 sees m ew 359 Inflation Pressures sasou tiamaraa neata 357 Jacking ss Rees 412 415 Life of Tires 2 0 es 363 Load Capacity ei eee ea aes 352 353 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 368 Quality Grading 3 sex d eere ete e 510 Radial eduardo eur aoa Sok ae 360 Replacement 2225224 biscnii dirns Ge 363 Rotation acne ee dum eue E ur do dee d 367 wc Me 348 356 en INDEX 531 SIZES cereus don a a Ba ROS AR 349 Snow Tires ix auk Boy od eee OS ev E 366 Spare r ek va aad Se aah aaa te 413 SPINNING sade halen baded n efc aem cage bs 362 Tread Wear Indicators 000 362 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 399 TOWING de EL 392 24 Hour Towing Assistance ls 120 Disabled Vehicle llle 428 GUIdE 60 6 gustan e ede e RD WEAR AR 396 Recreational cles 407 429 Weight eee exe dk gere isiy des ed 396 Towing Assistance llle 120 Traction Control 0 0 0 0 ees 339 Traction Control Switch 000000 339 Trailer Towing s s ssc sta gina edna GAIA GON ae 392 Cooling System Tips s setas cid Patosi k ii 407 Hitches iure ape oes EE 395 Minimum Requirements lille 400 Trailer and Tongue Weight 399 Wiring iet wile ate cui Bs aod Poesia doceo ed 404
94. 8 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Unfold Third Row Seats 1 Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors latch 2 Pull release strap marked 1 to unlock the recliner 3 Pulling strap 3 releases the seatback to return to its full upright position 4 Adjust the head restraint to the desired position WARNING In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments Always be sure the seats are fully latched Tailgate Mode 1 Pull release strap 2 then pull release strap 3 to rotate the entire seat rearward Tailgate Positioning Release Straps 2 amp 3 2 To restore the seat to its upright position lift up on the seatback and push forward until the anchors latch es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death never operate the vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in the tailgate mode EASY ACCESS SEATING The second row Stow n Go seats can be tilted forward for easy access to the third row seat or rear cargo area To tilt the seat pull forward on the release strap located on the front of the seat between the seatback and seat Tilting Second Row Stow n Go Seat cushion and tilt the seat fully forward LL WARNING To return the seat to its upright position
95. After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL contro
96. CAUTION The compact spare tire cover assembly must be used when the compact spare tire is stored Failure to use this cover could drastically reduce the life of the compact spare tire WARNING Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacer have been properly extended through the center of the wheel and spare tire cover assembly Failure to properly engage both retainer tabs could result in loss of the spare tire amp cover assembly which will cause vehicle damage and may cause loss of control of the vehicle 4 Using the winch T handle rotate the drive nut to the 6 right until the compact spare tire cover assembly is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle 5 Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear the winch mechanism click three times It cannot be overtightened Check under the vehicle to ensure the compact spare tire cover assembly is positioned cor rectly against the underside of the vehicle 424 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the For vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating the Winch Mechanism is designed specifically to stow a COMPACT Spare Tire ONLY Do not attempt to use the Winch to stow the Full Size Flat Tire or any othe
97. Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Vehicles Equipped With the Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC You can turn the Rear Park Assist System on or off through the CMTC by pressing the left reset button in the instrument cluster For details Refer to Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC in Section 4 of this manual Service The Rear Park Assist System If the Rear Park Assist System malfunctions the instru ment cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Compass Mini Trip Com puter CMTC or Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC as equipped in Section 4 of this manual If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC after mak ing sure the rear bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer Should this wrench symbol display with the letter P next to it your Park Sense System needs servicing Contact your authorized dealer Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System Clean the Rear Park Assist Sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors otherwise you could damage the sensors ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with
98. Compartment Storage Bins 215 Basic Console llle 203 Coat Hooks og ceder e erg ve 215 Premium Console If Equipped 205 Cargo Area Storage Dera kpa aa 216 hoo 6 6 thew gaa sGidesdidiiivegeas 209 W Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped 216 Glove Compartments suse wa eee ee o s 209 Wil biella Holder o crecca s eerie eis ves 219 Door Trim Panel Storage u a aar en eke eee 210 M Load Laveling System uenerat nn 219 Driver Seatback Storage If Equipped 211 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 MIRRORS Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the INSIDE DAY NIGHT MIRROR small control under the mirror to the night position Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear ee ee eee ee pee window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal Wile Gotan Meda DOSIQOR a and vertical adjustment of the mirror AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRROR IF EQUIPPED When using this feature the mirror will automatically adjust for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light in the button will indicate when the dimming feature is activated Ny NIGHT d m Z 80975a32 Manual Rearview Mirror 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se x Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never 818c6212 spray any cleaning s
99. E Rear Window Wipers function in the intermit tent wiper speed only es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 4 Headlamp Low and High Beam and Flash to Pass When the Headlights are turned on pushing the lever assembly toward the dash will switch from low beams to high beams Pulling back to the neutral position returns to low beam headlights Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the Multifunction Lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use TILT STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED To tilt the column pull the small lever downward located on the steering column and below the steering wheel to the open position You may then position the steering wheel up or down as desired Pull the small lever upward to the closed position to lock the steering wheel firmly in place WARNING Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked befor
100. E DOOR CHILD PROTECTION LOCK p o To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the sliding doors are equipped with a child protection door lock system NOTE When the child lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock 1 Open the sliding side door 1 808cea82 2 Slide the child lock control inward toward the ve Child Protection Door Lock hicle to engage the Child Protection Door Lock 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door NOTE e After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock al ways test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e When the Child Protection Door Lock system is en gaged even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter the switches on the overhead console or the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door The power sliding side door will operate from the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door regardless of the Child Protection Door Lock lever position To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding door from the rear seats press the ON Master Lock Out Switch lo cated in the front overhead console
101. EAR CENTER AUDIBLE SIGNAL 1st LED 78 7 in 200 cm Yellow Yes Half Second 2nd LED 51 1 in 130 cm Yellow None 3rd LED 45 2 in 115 cm Yellow None 4th LED 31 5 in 80 cm 39 3 in 100 cm Yellow None 5th LED 25 5 in 65 cm 33 5 in 85 cm Yellow None 6th LED 20 in 50 cm 27 6 in 70 cm Yellow None 7th LED 16 in 40 cm 19 7 in 50cm Red at 12 in 30 cm Intermittent 8th LED 6 in 15 cm 11 81 in 30 cm Red at 8 in 20 cm Continuous es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 WARNING NOTE The Rear Park Assist System will MUTE the radio if on when the audible warning is activated WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Park Assist System Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must con tinue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Before using the Rear Park Assist System it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning dis play turns the red LEDs ON Also the sensors
102. ED POWER MODULE y Du aaan a Cavity pred Pie Description J8 40 Amp Power Memory Seat If Green Equipped Mo paan Power Polling sgat 9 Amp PZEV Motor Flex Fuel Green Creen J2 30 Amp Power Liftgate Module Pink 474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE Cavity oo ps Description Cavity rid igi Description J10 30 Amp Headlamp Wash Relay J19 60 Amp Radiator Fan Pink Manual Tuning Valve Yellow Jil 30 Amp Power Sliding Door J20 30 Amp Front Wiper LO HI Pink Module Pink J13 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw IOD J21 20 Amp Front Rear Washer Yellow Main Yellow J14 40 Amp Rear Window Defogger J22 25 Amp Sunroof Module Green Natural J15 30 Amp Rear Blower M1 15 Amp Center High Mounted Pink Blue Stop Light CHMSL J17 M0 Amp Starter Solenoid Brake Switch Green M2 20 Amp Trailer Lighting J18 20 Amp Powertrain Control Yellow Yellow Module PCM Trans M3 20 Amp Range Yellow ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475 FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE Cartridge Mini NT Cartridge Mini fogs Cavity n Fuse Description Cavity Pu Fuse Description M4 10 Amp Trailer Tow M10 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw
103. EFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Light The light should come on and remain on for four seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the LED is not lit during starting and or the light stays on or comes ON while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield NOTE Ifthe defroster is not working or you are unable to feel air against the windshield in defrost mode please see your authorized dealer service center for repairs PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires includ ing spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after ove
104. EHICLE M MANUAL FRONT AND SECOND ROW SEAT Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the ADJUSTER seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched The adjusting bar is located under the front of the seat Pull the bar up and move the seat to the desired position WARNING Release the bar to lock the seat into position Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked S Manual Seat Adjuster es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 8 WAY DRIVERS POWER SEAT F EQUIPPED CAUTION The driver s power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat The front switch controls up down forward rearward and tilt adjustment The rear switch controls the seatback recline adjustment Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Pull up or push down on the head restraint cushion so that the upper edge is as high as practical To raise the head restraint pull up on the head restraint To lower the head restraint depress th
105. EL Se turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible 11 Brake System Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system if equipped BRAKE The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous
106. EMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Center amp Rear Dome Light 578 Center amp Rear Reading Lights 578 Front Door Courtesy Light 578 Front Header Reading Lights If Equipped 578 Instrument Cluster Lights PC74 Liftgate Light s seeker m 578 Overhead Console Reading Lights PC579 Removable Console Light If Equipped 194 Visor Vanity Lights 0004 6501966 NOTE For lighted switches see your dealer for replace ment instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb Number Backup Tail Stop Light 3157 Center High Mounted Stop Light LED See Note 1 Fog Light If Equipped 9145 Park Turn Signal PY27 7W or 3757A Front Side Marker 00000005 W5W Headlight Low and High Beam Halogen H11 Headlight HID If Equipped Low Beam D1S License E e I Rd ES 168 Note 1 The Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL is not serviceable It is a LED lamp To replace the LED the CHMSL assembly must be replaced 482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M BULB REPLACEMENT Headlights The headlight assembly consists of a quad lighting sys tem The high and low beam turn signal and side
107. ERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS IF EQUIPPED To the left of the instrument panel cup holder are two 12 volt power outlets The upper outlet is controlled by the ignition switch and the lower outlet is connected directly to the battery The upper outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit if equipped with an optional Smoker s Package A third outlet is located on the driver s side just to the rear of the sliding door and is also controlled by the ignition switch The lower and rear outlets will not accommodate a conventional cigar lighter unit The outlets include tethered caps labeled with a key or battery symbol indicating the power source The lower instrument panel outlet is powered directly from the battery items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent engine starting The lower outlet is protected by an automatic reset circuit breaker The automatic circuit breaker restores power when the overload is removed The circuit breaker also supplies power to the outlet in the removable floor console when in the front position Refer to section 3 Removable Floor Console in this manual NOTE If desired all of the power outlets can be converted by your a
108. Electronic Speed Control If Equipped e Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads e When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed e Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency es STARTING AND OPERATING 407 Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions e City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission gear selector lever in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed e Highway Driving Reduce speed e Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily e Refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more informa tion RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground CAUTION RECREATIONAL TOWING FOR THIS VEHICLE IS NOT RECOMMENDED NOTE If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS H Hazard Warning Flasher 410 MW Jump Starting Procedure 424 Milf Your Engine Overheats 410 Wl Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 427 H Jacking And Tire Changing 412 MH Towing A Disabled Vehicle
109. FT FEMALE STOP TURN 1 PINS PARK mie GND MALE PIN 813262be Four Pin Connector STARTING AND OPERATING 405 RUNNING BATTERY LAMPS BACKUP LAMPS LH STOP RH TURN STOP TURN ELECTRIC GROUND SE o o BRAKES 812634c6 Seven Pin Connector TOWING TIPS Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic 406 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The DRIVE gear can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE third gear with four speed transmission or fifth gear with six speed transmission should be selected NOTE Using third gear with four speed transmission or fifth gear with six speed transmission while operat ing the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to the Main tenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for trans mission fluid change intervals NOTE e Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing e The six speed automatic transmission is sealed and requires an authorized dealer service center to check the transmission fluid Towing Tips
110. IC 4 Press and release STEP button until the proper vari ance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the compass button to exit PERSONAL SETTINGS CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK If the trans mission is out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving a warning message PERSONAL SETTING NOT AVAIL ABLE followed in three seconds by VEHICLE NOT IN PARK es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the Step button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the reset button while in this display to select English Spanish Espa ol French Fran ais Italian Italiano German Deutsch and Dutch Nederlands Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PAR
111. ING 401 e Safety chains must always be used between your WARNING vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade and will not shift during travel When trailering When parking apply the parking brake on the tow cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in can occur that may be difficult for the driver to PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels control You could lose control of your vehicle and COWB must not be exceeded have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires e Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Trailer tongue weight rating for that trailer hitch This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of trailer tongue we
112. ING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 For UConnect Voice Recognition System VR refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the
113. IR CLEANER BRAKE FLUID BATTERY INTEGRATED FILTER RESERVOIR POWER MODULE WASHER COOLANT ENGINE OIL ENGINE OIL COOLANT FLUID BOTTLE PRESSURE CAP DIPSTICK FILL BOTTLE 81c421b5 es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 4 0L ENGINE COMPARTMENT POWER STEERING FLUID FUSES TOTAL AIR CLEANER BRAKE FLUID BATTERY INTEGRATED FILTER RESERVOIR POWER MODULE WASHER COOLANT ENGINE OIL ENGINE OIL COOLANT FLUID BOTTLE PRESSURE CAP FILL DIPSTICK BOTTLE 81c4996d 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability
114. If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions Gas props support the liftgate in the open position within the same cycle the system will automatically However because the gas pressure drops with tempera stop and must be opened or closed manually ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather WARNING SEAT STORAGE BIN e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison SEAT STORAGE BIN SAFETY WARNING ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your WARNING passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep Always close the storage bin covers when your ve the liftgate closed when you are operating the hicle is unattended Do not allow children to have vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode access to the second row seat storage bins Once in the storage bin young children may not be able to escape If trapped in the storage bin children can die from suffocation or heat stroke 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING CAUTION In an accident serious injury could result if the seat The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to storage bin covers are not properly latched avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks which have minimal clearance to the cover e Do not drive th
115. In order to Remote Start your vehicle the hood liftgate and all the doors must be closed and the transmission gear selector lever in PARK NOTE Remote Starting requires automatic transaxle equipped vehicles en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 How To Use Remote Start To Enter REMOTE START Mode All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Gear shift lever in PARK e Doors closed e Hood closed e Trunk closed e HAZARD switch off e BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed 81bbe8f e Ignition key removed from ignition switch Remote Starting Button e Battery at an acceptable charge level and Press and release the REMOTE START button e RKE PANIC button not pressed 23 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will honk twice if programmed Then the 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the REMOTE START mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e If your power door locks were unlocked REMOTE START will automatically LOCK the doors The park lights will turn on and remain on during REMOTE START mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if so equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the REMOTE START mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter How
116. K or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press of the remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors Ist Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button To make your selection press and release the RESET button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the dri
117. LL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types 16 Digit Character Program Type Display No program type or undefined nore Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Program Type wae ad Program Type Bb c ad Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Soft College College Soft Rock Soft Rck Country Country Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Foreign Language Language Sports Sp
118. Loading Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage 5 rre eene ees 319 480 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System 0 298 Warning Flasher Hazard 410 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description edem mE REY 228 Warnings and Cautions 00 6 Warranty Information 00 508 Washer Adding Fluid 0004 453 Washing Vehicle 0 0 2 piid pirina 467 Water Driving Ihrough RR 346 Wheel Alignment and Balance 365 Wheel and Wheel Trim 040 468 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 468 Wheel Bearings ese Iob a oka ae 466 Wheel Nut Torque cre een 421 en INDEX 533 Wind Buffeting 2e Rm ERREUR SE 44 196 Window Fogeing 2359 cep Rae ya ex 319 WindOWS ia ea xa G8 AER dex Reed e EROR OR 39 POWER 22h ccredbodavce nena hex ed ba dees 40 Rear Vent 52s xa EE PEE 39 Windshield Washers ss 171 453 Windshield Wiper Blades 04 453 Windshield Wipers 0 0 00000000 171 Wiper Blade Replacement 453 Wipers Intermittent aa maiii ae 172 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 470 Zone Control Temperature Control
119. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure FUEL SYSTEM CONNECTIONS The Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel system s hoses and quick connect fittings have unique material characteristics that provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline You are urged to use only the manufacture specified hoses with quick connect fittings or their equivalent in material and specification in any fuel system servicing It is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick connect fittings that have been removed during service Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings to Ensure they are properly installed and fully connected See your authorized dealer for service BRAKES In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte nance Schedules WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake And Power Steering Hoses When
120. MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names mH e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension nmm e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession fo
121. N The A C Air Filter is labeled with an arrow to indicate air flow direction through the filter Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often 7 Rotate the glove box door back into position POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership 452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type FRONT SUSPENSION BALL JOINTS The front suspension ball joints are permanently sealed No regular maintenance is required for these compo nents STEERING SHAFT SEAL The steering shaft seal at the point where the shaft passes through the bulkhead is lubricated when it is installed If the seal becomes noisy when the steering shaft is turned it should be lubricated with a multipurpose gre
122. NG YOUR VEHICLE M Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil or Refrigerants A C Air Filter If Equipped Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for A C Air Filter service intervals WARNING Do not remove the A C Air Filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result The A C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box Perform the following procedure to re place the filter 1 Open the glove box and remove all contents 2 Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the door 3 Pivot the glove box downward 4 Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451 A C Air Filter Replacement 5 Remove the A C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of the housing 6 Install the A C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover CAUTIO
123. NGINES ONLY E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel Ve hicles FFV only These vehicles can be identified by the unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Unleaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles 384 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 81ae46a9 81ae46ab E 85 Fuel Cap E 85 Badge ETHANOL FUEL E 85 1 CAUTION E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and Only vehicles with the E 85 Decal and or fuel filler 15 unleaded gasoline door label can operate on E 85 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two For best results a refueling pattern that alternates be tween E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided When you do switch fuels it is recommended that e you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
124. OUR VEHICLE M REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate and activate the PANIC alarm optional power liftgate left power sliding door and right power sliding door from distances up to about 23 ft 7 m using a hand held radio transmitter The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE If the key is in the ignition switch then all buttons on that transmitter will be disabled The buttons on the remaining transmitters will work If the gear selector lever is out of PARK all the transmitter buttons are disabled for all keys Two transmitters with may be supplied with the vehicle Vehicles built without the powered options will be equipped from the factory with three button transmitters and those built with power options will be equipped with up to seven button transmitters USING THE RKE TRANSMITTER Three button transmitters will provide basic UNLOCK LOCK and PANIC functions 81bb182d Three Button Transmitter Fob With Integrated Key Seven button transmitters will provide functions that allow the same basic operation as the three button but may also be used to OPEN CLOSE the optional power ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 liftgate left power sliding door or right power sliding door Other options of the system allow you to turn ON OFF the Sound Horn with the key fob transmitter LOCK UNLOCK and Flash Light
125. Once the turn signal is no longer active the DRL lamp will illuminate Headlights Turn the headlight switch knob to the 2nd Z detent to turn the headlights and park lights g ON This also turns ON all instrument panel lighting To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights rotate the dimmer control up or down Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns your headlights ON or OFF based on ambient light levels To turn the system ON turn the headlight switch to the extreme counter clockwise position aligning the indicator with the A on the headlight switch When the system is ON the Head light Time Delay feature is also ON This means your es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 headlights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the Automatic System OFF turn the headlight switch clockwise to the O OFF position 81bc85ed Automatic Headlights NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come ON in the Automatic mode Headlight Delay If Equipped This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle To activate the delay feature turn OFF the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn OFF the headlights within 45 seconds The 90 second delay inter val begins when headlight switch is turned OFF If the headlights or park lights are t
126. RKE transmitter e Always open the door smoothly e Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open ing the door This is very important when your vehicle is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in the downhill direction e There is a hold open latch that is activated when the sliding door is fully opened This latch will keep your sliding door open on any incline To close the sliding door after the hold open latch is activated you must rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the outside handle There are power sliding side door switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door for the rear seat passengers Pressing the switch once will open the power sliding door When the door is fully open pressing the switch a second time will close the door Press the button on the transmitter twice within five seconds to open a power sliding door When the door is fully open pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the door Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched anytime the vehicle is in motion 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE The power sliding side door must be unlocked If the inside or outside door handles are used while the before the power sliding door switches will operate power sliding side door is activated the power sliding door feature will be canceled and the door must be opened or closed manually
127. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS E INTRODUCTION eek mex m Uer EP ceew e eile oe e x ENERE EENET E T CE E e 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 02 c cc ccc ccc m tn 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 cece cece ccc t nnn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 ccc eccc cece eee hh nn 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 cc cece ccc r cece reer hh hh hh hn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 ccc ccc cece cece cece cece eee hh nnn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 ccc ccc sisusta cece c ccc hh 9 hh hn 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 2c cece cece c ccc c eee ehh hh ht 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 0 cc ceccccccccccccccceecvcesvcecvces 10 INDEX Op EEUU INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E Introduction anaa auaa ee 4 Vehicle Identification Number 6 Bl How To Use This Manuadl ss 4 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 H Warnings And Cautions 0 6 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicl
128. STRUMENT PANEL ME The REAR SYSTEM control for the Rear ATC System is on the front ATC control unit located on the instrument panel Pressing the REAR LOCK button for the Rear ATC System from the front ATC control unit illuminates a LOCK symbol in the rear display The rear temperature and air source are controlled from the front ATC control unit Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC control when the REAR LOCK button is turned OFF The Rear ATC System is located in the headliner near the center of the vehicle 81bc4f84 Rear ATC Control Features 3 Rear Lock 4 MODE 1 Blower 2 Temperature Operation of the rear system is quite simple 1 Press the REAR LOCK button on the front ATC control unit This turns off the REAR LOCK icon in the rear temperature knob es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 2 Rotate the Rear Blower Rear Temperature and the Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs 3 ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob counterclockwise to AUTO Once the desired temperature is displayed the ATC System will automatically achieve and maintain that comfort level When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e Itis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system au
129. Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert9 x EROR X REY 67 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 68 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Seat Belt Extender 0 0005 68 Restraining Infants And Small Children With Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag 69 ee iy eae us m Airbag System Components 70 Bl Engine Break In Recommendations Front Seat Airbag Features 70 MSafety Tips e 96 Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 75 ee RENE 96 Event Data Recorder EDR 81 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The DaimlerChrysler Corporation Integrated bon cep 96 Child Seat If Equipped 83 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Child Restraints esa paneha p 000 0000 84 Outside The Vehicle illus 97 lll Rear Seat Delete Feature Commercial Vehicles Only Tf Equipped 43x ese EIER E vs 92 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE xe A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter with integrated ignition Key and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the double sided key into the ignition switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar
130. The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide SALES CODE REN MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN Multimedia system contains a radio CD DVD player USB port a 20 gigabyte hard drive HDD and a JukeBox virtual CD changer Sirius Satellite Radio is optiona
131. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message gASCAP Should the Loose Fuel Filler Cap or gASCAP mes sage appear there may be a problem in the evaporative system Before taking the vehicle into an authorized dealer check first to see if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improperly installed or damaged A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the prob lem will turn the MIL light off Take your vehicle in to an authorized dealer MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfuncti
132. To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding doors from the rear seats press the power sliding door master lock button located in the overhead console to disable the switches for the rear seat passengers NOTE e If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while it is closing or opening the door will automati cally reverse to the closed or open position provided 81bb8d d it meets sufficient resistance Sliding Side Door Detail e The left side sliding door cannot be opened while the 1 Heated Seat 4 Door Handle A 5 Power Door OPEN fuel door is open This feature operates only when the 2 Power Window CLOSE sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the fuel 3 Manual Lock door ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 e Ifthe power sliding side door is not in the fullopenor Power Sliding Side Door Open Flash close position it will fully open when a power sliding The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for 12 door switch is pressed To close the door wait until it seconds when either sliding door is opened This will is fully open and then press the switch again alert other drivers in the area that passenger s could be P PARERE teri iting the vehicle e The power sliding side door switches will not operate uM ME LLL E if the transmission gear selector lever is in gear or the The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or vehicle speed is above 0 mph
133. a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming Begin Programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so pr
134. a storage bin latch as a tie down Second Row Seat Release Handle TUUNPOLD SECOND ROW SEATS 3 Pull up on the seatback recliner lever located on the 1 Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the outboard side of the seat to return the seatback to its full Locked position and then pull up on the storage bin upright position latch to open the cover 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Second Row Seatback Release Lever 4 Close the storage bin cover and adjust the head restraint to the desired position Second Row Bench Seat If Equipped While the bench seat does not stow in the floor it is removable for added cargo space Rollers integrated into the seat frame ease removal through the rear Floor storage compartments are still available with the bench seat Third Row Power Seat If Equipped The third row power seat offers the following features e The seatbacks can be folded forward for additional cargo space if needed e Head restraints can be stowed with the seat e Tailgate mode flips the seat rearward to face out the tailgate The power recline feature located on the side of the seat cushion adjusts the seatback angle forward rearward for occupant comfort es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Remote Third Row Power Seat Switch If Equipped A One Touch Third Row Power Folding Seat switch is located in the left rear trim panel as part of a switch bank Thir
135. a tire with a smaller load index or specified for your vehicle Some combinations of capacity other than what was originally equipped unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load dimensions and performance characteristics result index could result in tire overloading and failure ing in changes to steering handling and braking of You could lose control and have an accident your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle CAUTION Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings ee STARTING AND OPERATING 365 Alignment and Tire Balance Poor suspension alignment may result in e Fast tire wear e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided wear e Vehicle pull to right or left Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right Alignment will not correct this condition See your authorized dealer for proper diagnosis Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balanc
136. able features in the Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC section for more infor mation 12 Repeat the above steps to set the next Memory Position using the other numbered Memory Button or to link another Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to memory MEMORY POSITION RECALL NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC To recall the memory settings for driver one press Memory Button 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to Memory Position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press Memory Button 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to Memory Position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory buttons on the driver s door during a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat driver s mirror and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TO DISABLE A TRANSMITTER LINKED TO MEMORY 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key 2 Press and release Memory Button 1 The system will recall any memory settings stored in position 1 Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before cont
137. ame for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name e You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 with 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect system The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination Based on the country in which the ve hicle was purchased the UConnect system limits the user from dialing an invalid combination of numbers For example in the U S 234 567 890 is nine digits long which is not a valid U S phone number the closest valid phone number has 10 digits The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radio
138. an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service If your seat includ ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer ap proved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Airbag Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in a collision While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system immediately e The AIRBAG light does not come on during the approximately four to six seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON The li
139. ange the zone press and release the CMTC reset button to incre ment the variance one step Repeat as necessary until the desired variance is achieved NOTE The factory default Zone is 8 During program ming the zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to Zone 1 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic inaccurate or abnormal you may wish to calibrate the compass Prior to calibrat ing the compass make sure the proper zone is selected 1 Start the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position 2 Press and hold approximately 10 seconds the CMTC mm reset button until the current variance zone number is displayed 3 Release the CMTC reset button then press and hold again approximately 10 seconds until the direction is displayed with the CAL indicator on continuously in the display 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 4 To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED NOTE The compass on your vehicle is self calibrating eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the lower half of the speedometer
140. ant 494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake flu ids Mopar Power Steering Fluid 4 or Mopar ATF 4 Au tomatic Transmission Fluid Brake Master Cylinder Power Steering Reservoir MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ll Emissions Control System Maintenance 496 Required Maintenance Intervals MI Maintenance Schedule 0 496 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 496 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected
141. are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 If the Security Alarm System is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the system will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the exterior lights will flash the horn will sound and the ignition will not start the vehicle If this occurs disarm the system Tamper Alert If something has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors and the security telltale light will flash for 30 seconds Check the vehicle for tampering Security System Manual Override The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open the doors This feature is only available if you have RKE The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned on NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console door courtesy and liftgate lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position extreme top position e The Illuminated Entry System will not operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING Y
142. ark over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs the vehicle should be stopped the engine shut off and the vehicle allowed to cool Thereafter service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications should be ob tained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447 damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
143. arked vehicle with the engine running for an extended left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle NOTE The driver s side sliding door cannot be opened Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance while the fuel door is open This feature operates only Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is s raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open fuel door Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to pre vent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle 382 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION WARNING Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near tem could result from using an improper fuel tank the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let tank filled impurities into the fuel system and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to turn on due to fuel vapors escaping from the system e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and
144. armer air from the floor outlets HEADLINER Mode Air comes from the outlets in the headliner Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL ATC IF EQUIPPED e Front Three Zone ATC allows both the driver and front occupant and rear seat occupants to select individual comfort settings e Occupants in the vehicle select AUTO mode operation and a comfort temperature setting using rotary knobs on the control unit e The system provides set and forget operation for op timum comfort and convenience e The system can be controlled manually if desired ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 e SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones allowing one comfort setting for the cabin if desired The Infrared Three Zone ATC System automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and all passengers This is accomplished by an infrared sensor located in the forward overhead console Based on the sensor input the system automatically adjusts the air temperature the airflow volume and amount of outside air recirculation This maintains a comfortable temperature even under changing conditions 81bc4f86 Front Upper ATC Panel 1 Left Temp On Off 9 Right Temp A C On Off 2 Blower 10 AUTO Temp 3 Left Front Temp 11 MODE 4 Rear Blower Temp 12
145. as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone uy amp for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with radio e The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the UConnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 The radio display will be used for vi
146. ase Mopar multipurpose lubricant is recommended Steering Linkage The tie rod end ball joints are permanently lubricated and do not require periodic maintenance DRIVE SHAFT UNIVERSAL JOINTS Your vehicle has constant velocity universal joints Peri odic lubrication of these joints is not required However the joint boots should be inspected for external leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed If leakage or damage is evident the universal joint boot and grease should be replaced immediately ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453 Continued operation could result in failure of the univer sal joint due to water and dirt contamination of the grease This would require complete replacement of the joint assembly BODY LUBRICATION Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors liftgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mecha nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the fall and sp
147. ating ensure that the strap is routed underneath the top of the seatback and the head restraint 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Child restraint systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com patible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of child
148. ation will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The sta tions stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable com pact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a d
149. attery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while battery is in vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449 E Dru am For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system performance check Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman 450 MAINTAINI
150. avel Information Center 184 Overheating Engine llle 236 410 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 509 Panic Alarm mees sites du pde ey eaae es 25 Park Sense System Rear 0 0006 174 Parking Brake sere RE eR RR eem 334 Parking On Hill 0 ee 335 Passing Light scie mee 171 173 Pedals Adjustable s ce s iesio ser sis 179 Personal Settings occ conde HA SSS 250 Pets Transporting 45e eee ke 91 Phone Cellular sss 107 285 286 Phone Hands Free UConnect 107 285 286 Placard Tire and Loading Information 352 Port Universal Serial Bus USB 282 285 USB depen ruere dunes 282 285 Power Brakes u2co Ee dsa 00000008 2004 336 Distribution Center Fuses 473 Door Locks 2 24 RR 35 LiftGate ace ees ee das RUE wa D RR edes 52 Mirrors zxeinsc era cee Rew OR Le GRAY 105 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 197 Seats oa ee aw 4E Geka OPE ao edie yh aoe 135 Sliding Door 1 1 6 6 eee 45 Steering siu ed apace GA d rb duci eet 344 Steering Checking lille 451 SunfOO x4 PAA SRO xg d Pac E RES 194 WI OWS 42a ako dedi do eo des E d de d 40 Power Steering Fluid 04 494 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 68 Preparation for Jacking 06 414 en INDEX 527 Pretensioners Seat Belts i232 eue grease dou Uma an RC ed 66 Programmable Electronic Features 250
151. ay Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the STEP button until US or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the RESET button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the RESET button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Reset ALL will display during this three second window COMPASS DISPLAY The compass readings indicate the direction OD the vehicle is facing Press and release the compass button to display one of eight com pass readings and the outside temperature es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calib
152. ays fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 Closing the Sunroof Manually To Close the sunroof from an open or vent position press and hold the switch forward The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically Release the switch to stop sun roof travel at any point Sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunroof sunshade can be opened manually How ever the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Express Open Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Auto Express Vent Press and release the V button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Auto Express Close Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof w
153. b lished Raising the lever RESUME ACCEL upwards once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped upwards speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 5 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is SET press the lever SET DECEL downward and hold Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be SET Tapping the lever SET DECEL downward once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped downward speed decreases es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure proper operation If this occurs the system can be reactivated by pushing the speed control switch ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle SET speed TO ACCELERATE FOR PASSING Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal Your vehicle may experience a downshift automatic transmissions only while climbing uphill or descending downhill This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable
154. bjects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets The electrical system could overload causing damage to the blower motor Rear Temperature Control When the blower knob on the front climate control unit is set to any position other than RR the rear temperature selection follows the setting of the rear temperature control knob on the front climate control unit The rear mode selection follows the setting of the rear mode control knob To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for cold and clockwise for heated air When rear controls are locked by the front system the lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated and the rear overhead adjustments are ignored 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit opera tion Rear PANEL mode is automatically selected when the front control is in the PANEL mode When the front unit is in BI LEVEL mode airflow will be emitted from both the upper and lower rear outlets When the front control is in FLOOR DEFROST or MIX modes airflow will be directed out of the rear floor outlets Rear Mode Control FLOOR Mode Air comes from the floor outlets BI LEVEL Mode v Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the BI LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head liner outlets and w
155. broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual MAINTENANCE FREE BATTERY The top of the MAINTENANCE FREE battery is perma nently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required 448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling b
156. ce or vehicle stability during braking may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ABS ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake per formance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e Aclicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations 338 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end WARNING of the stop i WARNING e The Anti Lock Brake System cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive e The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisti speed dn tuma SERIE another venice d f closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive cated electronic equipment that may be suscep P and skillful driver can prevent accidents tible to interference caused by improperly in stalled or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possibl
157. ch enables you to stow long objects such as lumber or skis on the floor without moving the seats NOTE With all rear seat backs folded a 4 x 8 ft 1 2 x 2 4 m sheet of building material may be stored on top of the folded seats with the liftgate closed The front seats must be moved slightly forward of the rearmost position If the rear seats are removed no front seat adjustment is needed and more than one 4 x 8 ft 1 2 x 2 4 m sheet of building material may be stored The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement Load To This Line This line indicates how far rearward cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate closing Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity To move the crossbars loosen the thumb screws located at the upper edge of each crossbar approximately six turns then move the crossbar to the desired position keeping the crossbars pa
158. cked or unlocked The system uses the factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter with integrated key and Wireless Igni tion Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera tion Therefore only RKE transmitters that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid RKE transmitter is used to start the engine After turning the ignition switch to the ON position the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid RKE transmitter to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle ser viced as soon as possible 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection e Exxon Mobil Speedpass additional RKE transmit
159. cle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your authorized selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians 506 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M special tools and the latest information to ensure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance If your authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Cus tomer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following info
160. cle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR 390 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty CAUTION weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribu
161. co Contact ssl bm RR 506 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 507 Service Contract coser ere 507 lll Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 508 W Mopar Parts aaau sk ee EX REISEEa ces 508 E Reporting Safety Defects 00 0 508 In The 50 United States And Washington D C iesus RR RS 508 In Canada 504 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ME Bl Publication Order Forms lesus 509 Traction Grades lllsesn 511 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Temperature Grades 00 512 Quality Grades sae eere RR ans 510 TreadWear cvgoes eue poe cw exu os 511 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 505 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehi
162. commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Y at a time Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 Phonebook Enter Number New Entry Added 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Setup Confirmation will English Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais on off Say 4 digit System Lists override pin code Phones Select phone ren p to be deleted ISP HOUSES P i Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System System Lists All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 819402e4 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands
163. ct switch again to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position The mirror selection will also automatically change to neutral after 30 seconds 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 81 bb6db9 Power Side Mirror Adjust 1 Left Mirror 2 Right Mirror 3 Adjusting Switch Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for the direction you want the mirror to move Driver s power mirror preselected positions can be con trolled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in section 3 of this manual ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS IF EQUIPPED An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights turn on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights Sun Visor Slide Out Feature The sun visor slide on rod feature allows for addi tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun 1 Fold down sun visor 2 Pull the sun visor toward inside rearview mirror to extend es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER radio contains an inte grated Hands Free Communication UConnect sys tem Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for UConnect system operating instructions for this radio UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle comm
164. ctronic Brake Force Distribu tion EBD systems are not functioning Immediate repair STARTING AND OPERATING 339 to the ABS system is required Consult with your autho rized dealer service center as soon as possible ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEMS Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes TCS Traction Control System BAS Brake Assist System and ESP Electronic Stability Program These systems complement the Anti Lock Brake System ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency braking maneu vers Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is 340 STARTING AND OPERATING ME spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if the ESP is in the Partial Off mode The Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin This in
165. cts or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your authorized dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 509 To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washing ton D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Departme
166. d by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode
167. d Row Power Seat Switch WARNING To avoid serious injury or death never operate the vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in the tailgate mode 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and unfolding positions for the third row seats Left and right third row seats can be folded individually or together The One Touch Third Row Power Folding Seat adjusts to the following positions using the switch bank located on the left rear trim panel 81bd1665 Rear Panel Power Switch Bank 1 OPEN 4 Folds seatbacks flat 2 STOW 5 RIGHT LEFT seats oper ate individually 3 Tailgate Mode 5 BOTH seats operate to gether es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 NOTE The Third Row Power Seat system includes obstacle detection for safe operation When the system detects an obstacle the motors will stop and reverse the motion for a brief period Should this occur remove the obstacle and repress the button again for the desired position To Fold Third Row Seats Manually If Equipped 1 Lower the head restraint to its full down position 2 Pull release strap marked 1 located on the rear of the seat to lower the seatback 3 Pull release strap marked 2 to release the anchors Folding Third Row Seat Strap 4 Pull release strap marked 3 and tumble the seat rearward into the storage bin 14
168. d by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy down ward covering both windows on the impact side NOTE Should a vehicle rollover occur the SABIC curtains on both sides of the vehicle are deployed NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy during an impact severe enough to require airbag occupant protection en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 WARNING If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts Along with seat belts and pretensioners front airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions If your vehicle is equipped the side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is tr
169. d salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove e Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your ve
170. d this entire manual you may miss important infor mation Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on the Auto mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and title Vehicle Identification Number NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN en INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS ua Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its road worthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Word About Your Keys 00 12 Wireless Ignition Node WIN 12 H Sentry Key Immobilizer System 15 Replacement Keys s escr 464 25 Rib aw 16 ll Steering Wheel Lock If Equipped 18 If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel uasa e eg RR ERR Rad 18 To Release The Steering Wheel Lock 18 Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System 19 H Security Alarm System If Equipped 19 Rearming Of The System 19 To Arm The System 0000005 19 To Disarm The System 0 20 Securi
171. delete es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System UConnect Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the PHONE button and say UConnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the Voice Recognition button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the Voice Recognition button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect system For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched OFF This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking
172. dicates that the TCS is active If the indicator light flashes during accel eration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and do not switch off the ESP or TCS WARNING e The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The TCS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a TCS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS
173. dicator 235 Side Marker o oc pia eor bk dbs 486 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 233 Turti Signal ux eR EXER Ren 169 483 486 Voltage zacesce me rte ee nhe ES 228 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 228 Load Leveling System 000050 219 Loading Vehicle ssa cmm 216 387 390 Capacities vs ek uv meg e heehee y 390 TAOS Re dcr eh d gres Aa ee RR Qaid 352 Locks DOGE Mm 32 Steering Wheel 0 0000 18 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH s2ieha sae oe char an dae ice oe oat tn 88 Lubrication Body 1 ee eee 453 Luggage Rack Roof Rack 216 Lumbar Support 6 0 6 6 000 139 Maintenance Free Battery 04 447 Maintenance Procedures 0040 440 Maintenance Schedule 04 496 Maintenance Sunroof 000 eevee 197 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 235 437 Manual Service 6 2 0 ce eee 509 Map Reading Lights 046 185 Memory Feature Memory Seat 157 Memory Seat eve Osce cete ae tte ad 106 157 nn INDEX 525 Mini Trip Computer ss sss sase ssrsse sses 240 247 Occupant Restraints 0 0 58 75 77 Mirrors cu cerdo ce AE eo Se a e be WE 103 Occupant Restraints Sedan 71 72 75 77 Automatic Dimming sess 103 Odometer ssi iba see RR RS ARS 238 Electric Remote 0 0 00 eae 105 Oil Change Indicator
174. e NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed Index at the back of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 a RO y sD e 2 wd a BRS ELECTRONIC STABILITY WATERINFUEL REARWINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULA HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE WIPER INTERMITTENT FAILURE OUTLET Low PEDALS SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE g 3 d 9 l af O 1 cz T BRAKE SYSTEM FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD MASTERLIGHTING LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE UPPERANDLOWER HEATEDSEAT WINDOWLIFT TIRE PRESSURE HILLDESCENT WARNING PARKING INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET HIGH MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE S CIO y scan Z lt AWD I H Cv T FUELFILLSIDE REARWINDOW WINDSHIELD WASHER DOMELIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT
175. e e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehi
176. e 36 0444 pepe har kae d 182 To Resume Speed ueira sa uaia ia e 182 To Vary The Speed Setting 182 To Accelerate For Passing 183 H Overhead Consoles 0 000 c eens 184 Front Overhead Consoles As Equipped 184 186 Rear Overhead Consoles As Equipped ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped Programming HomeLink Gate Operator Canadian Programming 192 SeCUrIly 4a edes dde rd e b y db a res 193 Troubleshooting Tips ossea ss iseset dnes 193 General Information 193 ower Sunroof If Equipped 194 Power Sunroof Operation 194 lectrical Power Outlets If Equipped 197 Power Inverter If Equipped 198 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off 199 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M H Sun Screens If Equipped 200 Second Row Seat Floor Storage Bins If ll Convenience Tray Drawer And Cup Holders 201 ee ee 212 Instrument Panel Cupholders 201 B i dodi a e DEM 213 Interior Bottle Holders nnna nananana 202 Removable Floor Console With Stow N Go Smoker s Package Kit If Equipped 202 Seating If Equipped 214 a Console Features 2usdococtesrtiieriwiee 203 Rear
177. e UConnect Hands Free Bluetooth cellular system NOTE If your vehicle is not equipped with UConnect the unit will respond with a Not Equipped With UConnect message when selecting controls related to this feature A 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows easy menu selec tion while the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes more than 1 000 words for audio navigation entertain ment and hands free mobile phone use 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The satellite navigation capability combines a Global Positioning System GPS based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps turn identi fication selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes A shared HDD for the navigation system the database and other radio features allows uploads of music and photos from CDs or through the USB port The Gracenote database finds the artist track and title for the music An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a portable MP3 player through the vehicle s speakers For vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System VES separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen to the vehicle speakers while different audio tracks play through the system s wireless headphones This means rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional rear seat entertainment system while the driver and front seat passenger listen to the radio Other specia
178. e bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 3 Reconnect wire harness to bulb 4 Install bulb 1 and twist clockwise 5 Reconnect the battery cable Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal Side Marker and Backup Lights 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Remove light by removing the two fasteners from the inboard side Use a fiber stick or similar tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side to dislodge the two ball studs ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487 81bc563e 81bc5641 Removing Fasteners 1 Stop Tail Turn Signal bulb combo NOTE 2 Backup Bulb 7 e If a screwdriver is used make sure a soft material is 3 Remove the socket by rotating counter clockwise penat du M Body ak baal pa ma iy 4 Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket e The PRY location is best closest to the studs while dislodging them separately 488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 5 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the light assembly Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL The CHMSL uses LED lights are not serviceable sepa rately The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly 1 Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable 2 Open the rear liftgate and disconnect the washer hose from the CHMSL unit 3 Remove the liftgate spoiler assembly ae Replacement of CHMSL Light Unit 1 Mounting Screws ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489 4 Remove the two screw
179. e loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer Anti Lock Brake Light The ABS light monitors the Anti Lock System s The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the ABS light does not come on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on the ABS and Ele
180. e make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the gear selector lever in the PARK position To release the parking brake depress the emergency break pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector lever out of PARK WARNING e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury 71 21 9i x Parking Brake Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and before driving failure to do so can lead to brake the gear selector lever is in the PARK position When problems due to excessive heating of the rear parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake brakes before placing the gear selector lever in PARK otherwise 336 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle When parking on a
181. e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phonebook The UConnect phonebook nametag recognition rate is optimized for the person who stored the name in the phonebook You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 e Ina convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is max
182. e address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing names in the phonebook is recom mended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the R
183. e driving 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Tilt Steering Column Control REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The manufacturer suggests disabling the Rear Park Assist System when towing a trailer Refer to Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC or Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC as equipped in Section 4 The Rear Park Assist System provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and the detected obstacle when backing up When backing up the driver should also use the inside rearview and outside mirrors The Rear Park Assist System will remember the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the RUN ON position The Rear Park Assist System can be active only when the transaxle gear selector lever is in REVERSE When in REVERSE the system scans for objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in the rear bumper NOTE The system will be active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will be active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Rear Park Assist Sensors The four Rear Park Assist Sensors located in the rear fascia monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The monitored area se
184. e ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to the Occupant Re straints section for more information 19 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system C called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The light will illu minate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing If the Malfunction Indicator Light flashes when the engine is running serious conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 20 Airbag Light This light turns on and remains on for seven 9 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
185. e is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift NOTE If either front tire is flat it may be necessary to jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire cover assembly from under the vehicle Refer to jack engagement locations in the following steps for proper jack placement Spare Tire Hook amp Removal 418 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 4 When the compact spare tire cover assembly is clear 5 There are two jack engagement locations on each side of the vehicle stand the tire cover assembly upright and of the vehicle body These locations are on the sill flange remove the wheel spacer by squeezing the two retaining of the vehicle body tabs is a NOTE Rear jack location is between a pair of down standing tabs on the sill flange of the vehicle body Front jack location is on the sill flange of the vehicle body and aligns with the front door edge Squeezing Winch Retainer Tabs WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 419 81bc524c Jack Location 420 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in step 5 6 Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the right until the jack head is properly engaged in the described
186. e on e The hood is opened e The HAZARD Switch is pressed e The transmission gear selector lever is moved out of PARK e Pressing the brake pedal e Allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle To Turn Off the Engine While in REMOTE START Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button one time NOTE To avoid inadvertent shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid REMOTE START request 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee When To Reset REMOTE START DOOR LOCKS The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of MANUAL DOOR LOCKS two times The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one failed start where the Remote Starting sequence was initiated but the engine stopped cranking without start ing After either of these conditions or if the Security Alarm System is alarming or if the PANIC button was pressed the vehicle must be reset by inserting a valid key into the Ignition Switch rotating to the RUN position and then rotating back to the LOCK OFF position Lock the doors by pushing down on the lock plungers on each door trim panel en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 If the lock plunger is down when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the keys are not AESSINUNNES inside the vehicle before closing the door e For personal security and safety in the event of an accide
187. e player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD SCAN Button Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button Switches the AM or FM radio to the opposite radio mode RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW
188. e radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton Ah with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or an
189. e release tab located at the base of the head restraint and push down on the head restraint 81bd1648 Driver Power Seat Switch 1 Bottom Control 2 Seatback Control 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M HEATED SEATS IF EQUIPPED This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats The controls for front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area The switch in dicator lights will show when the HIGH or LOW heat is ON Press the switch once to choose HIGH two Lights press a second time to choose LOW one light press a third time for No Heat no lights 81bd1653 81bd164e Adjusting The Head Restraint Cushion 1 Removal Release 2 Lowering Release es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Second row heated seat switches are located in the WARNING sliding side door handle trim panels and function the i same as front switches Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat 81bb8d6 d Sliding Door Controls 1 Heated Seat 4 Door Handle 2
190. e vehicle with the storage bin covers open Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release while the vehicle is in motion As a security measure a Storage Bin Cover Emergency Do not operate the storage bin covers while the Release strap is built into the storage bin cover latching mechanism vehicle is in motion Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Reinstalling Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release If the storage bin cover strap disengages from the latch it can be reinstalled by inserting the loose end of the strap into the latch mechanism Push the strap into the latch mechanism until it engages around the latch post Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Strap NOTE In the event of an individual being locked inside the storage bin the storage bin cover can be opened from inside of the bin by pulling Ron the glow in the dark strap attached to the storage bin cover latching mecha nism 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Reinstalling Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Strap NOTE Do not use the storage bin emergency release to lift the storage bin cover The strap is intended for emergency release only e OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions Pretensi
191. eady and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not ready if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439 serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty AUTHORIZED DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civi
192. eady prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 e After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names EC e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries
193. eatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function es UNDERSTAND
194. ehicle consist of a series of outer rotary dials inner push knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions 81c2cd2b Manual HVAC Controls ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 Front Blower Control There are four blower speeds Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the OFF position Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotate the knob coun terclockwise from top center into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating the knob clockwise into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumu lation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribu tion You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular mode the more air distribution you receive from t
195. eign Language Language Sports Sports 3 Lo ports OS momen em Talk Talk azz azz News News Top 40 Dp Weather Weather Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between Il playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped E e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT
196. ems oval in shape The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi mately 11 8 in 30 cm up to 78 7 in 200 cm from the rear fascia in the horizontal direction depending on the location and orientation of the obstacle and the type of obstacle Rear Park Assist Warning Display The Rear Park Assist Warning Display located in the headliner near the liftgate glass provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia and the detected obstacle Rear Park Assist LED Lights When the ignition switch is turned to the RUN ON position the warning display will turn ON all of its LEDs for about one second Each side of the warning display has six yellow and two red LED lights one set to warn of obstacles behind the left rear of the vehicle and the other 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x set to warn of obstacles behind the right rear of the vehicle The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the red LED is ON The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle The driver can view the LEDs either through the rear view mirror or by looking directly at the display above the rear window PARK ASSIST WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM DISPLAY LED REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER R
197. ences in road characteristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 512 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing eithe
198. engers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 CAUTION WARNING e Driving through standing water may cause dam e Driving through standing water limits your vehi age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities
199. er form at the back of this manual and specify publication number 81 016 8050 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants and Small Children There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs
200. erate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the cold windshield Mopar All Weather Windshield Washer Solution used with water as directed on the container aids cleaning action reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging and is not harmful to paint or trim COOLING SYSTEM WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455 Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and
201. eration Push on this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the A C System is engaged 81b9dd53 NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and RECIRCULA TION mode buttons at the same time Three Zone Basic Temperature Control If Equipped With the Three Zone Basic Temperature Control System each front seat occupant can independently control the Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning HVAC op erations coming from the outlets on their side of the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 The Three Zone Basic Temperature Control bottom panel controls rear Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning HVAC operations 81b9ea8d Front Upper Three Zone Temperature Control 1 Left Temp 7 Right Temp 2 PANEL 8 Rear DEFROST 81bc4f90 BI LEVEL 9 RECIRCULATE BLOWER 10 MIX Front Lower Three Zone Temperature Control Features 5 A C 11 FLOOR 1 Left Heated Seat 3 Rear Temp 6 Front DEFROST 2 Rear Blower 4 Right Heated Seat 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The primary control for the rear blower is on the front climate control unit located on the instrument panel The front climate control unit has five positions OFF REAR and a range of blower speeds Only when the primary control for the rear blo
202. ering see your doctor immediately e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 WARNING Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by
203. erior Lighting At the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights standard dome light has two buttons The lights turn on when a front door a sliding door or the liftgate is opened If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the transmitter is pressed The courtesy lights also function as reading lights Press in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle Press a second time to turn the each light off You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the outside ring which is identified with four directional arrows The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also illuminated from a light in the overhead console This light is turned on when the headlight switch is ON and will adjust in brightness when the dimmer control is rotated up or down 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Sunglass Storage At the rear of the front overhead console a compartment is provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses Press the door latch to open the compartment The door will slowly rotate to an open position NOTE The front overhead console used with factory sunroof incorporates a sunroof switch REAR OVERHEAD CONSOLES AS EQUIPPED The rear overhead storage system is available in two versions with or without sunroof An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines down on the second row footwell area w
204. essed after five seconds press the UNLOCK button Release both buttons The Remote Key Unlock feature can be reactivated by repeating the above procedure or by performing the procedure in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features section on vehicles so equipped For other power lock features refer to Remote Keyless Entry earlier in this section WINDOWS POWER VENT WINDOWS IF EQUIPPED Switches on the driver s door trim panel let the driver PN operate the two vent windows from the driver s seat 81b78a1a Power Vent Window Switches 1 OPEN 2 CLOSE 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se POWER WINDOWS Driver s Master Power Window Switches You can control either front window using switches on the driver s door trim panel The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position and during power accessory delay NOTE Power Window Switches will also remain active for up to 90 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off depending upon the accessory delay setting Opening the front door will cancel this feature 81b78a19 Driver s Power Window Switches 1 Left Rear 3 Left Front 2 Right Rear 4 Right Front ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Power Window Lockout Switch If Equipped Front Passenger Power Window Switch The driver may lock out all power windows by depress There
205. et all emis sions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular REGOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD STARTING AND OPERATING 377 gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance 4 0L Gasoline Engine If Equipped The 4 0L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline hav ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu facturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular and mid grade gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required 378 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of regular gasoline be fore consideri
206. ever the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Enter the Vehicle After REMOTE START To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a Remote Start you must first unlock the vehicle using the UNLOCK button on the transmitter After the vehicle is unlocked you have 60 seconds to enter the vehicle insert the key into the Ignition Switch and move it to the RUN position otherwise the engine will cancel Remote Start ing and automatically turn off To Exit REMOTE START Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the message Insert Key Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you insert the key Once inserted the message Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to run Cancel REMOTE START Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following occur e The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning telltale lights com
207. f Coolant Antifreeze 455 493 Sentry Key Immobilizer 15 Sentry Key Programming 00 17 Sentry Key Replacement 16 Service Assistance 00 eee ee eee 505 Service Contract ree carr araea ees 507 en INDEX 529 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator 0 235 Service Manuals les 509 Setting the Clock 00 256 271 283 287 Settings Personal 0 0 eee eee eee 250 Shoulder Belts ee er arm 60 Signals Tum isses 169 231 483 486 Sliding Door cas 226 6ieass ge HR eak nn 44 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 345 Snow Chains Tire Chains 365 SNOW Tires ns ured ga da EGRE wa eS Wo 366 Sound Systems Radio 282 285 Spare lire 226 re ee e 360 361 413 Spark Plugs 04a ho ERR RSS wee 444 Speed Control Cruise Control 181 Speedmeter i ass bai tia baw anro GUA ae dores 231 Staring eod pentr etits oh RP ed dor smet 326 Automatic Transmission s ssaa aasa 326 Cold Weather llle 327 Engine Fails to Start llle 328 Remote sesana seaga ea ce epo te eS 28 Starting and Operating 040 326 Starting Procedures 0 0 0 0 0 cae 326 Steering Column Controls 1 2 0 0 0 0 2 2 eee 169 Linkage nodu sexe aria Se PE ICH eR 452 POWE ies eod ns pe eben ede 344451 Shaft Seal occa cisco e b x
208. f the airflow from the center outlets The thumbwheel next to the outboard outlets can be rotated to regulate or shut off the airflow from these outlets BI LEVEL Mode 74 Air comes from both the instrument panel outlets floor outlets and defrost A slight amount of air is also directed through the side window demister outlets x NOTE In many temperature positions the BI LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets FLOOR Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets MIX Mode qt e Air comes from the floor defrost and side window x demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions It allows you to stay comfortable while keeping the windshield clear DEFROST Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use DEFROST mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting w NOTE While operating in the other modes the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield DEFROST mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass The SNOWFLAKE mode or A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When in SNOWFLAKE mode the ATC display is ON cool dehumidified air flows through the ai
209. federal fire regula tions and will cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on CAUTION NOTE To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top e Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a clicking off the fuel tank after filling sound This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the e If the gas cap is not tightened properly the Malfunc fuel tank is full tion Indicator Light may come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled es STARTING AND OPERATING 383 WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message e Ifthe gASCAP message is displayed in the instrument cluster this signifies a leak or change in the evapora tive system is detected Sometimes this is the result of a loosely fitting or possibly damaged filler cap Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn the gASCAP message off e Make sure that the fuel filler cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started See your authorized dealer service center as soon as possible See Section 7 of this manual for more information FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 3L E
210. ference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the PHONE button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the PHONE button to begin 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can
211. for driver 1 or button number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2 The system will recall any stored settings Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to step 3 3 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and driver s side view mirror to the desired positions 4 Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions 5 Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets up to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set 6 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key 7 Press and release the SET S button located on the driver s door A chime will sound signaling that you are in the memory set mode 8 Within five seconds press and release Memory Button 1 or 2 on the driver s door A chime will sound signaling to you that the driver memory has been set The next step must be performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to recall memory positions 9 Press and release the LOCK button on one of the transmitters A chime will sound signaling to you that the transmitter has been successfully linked to memory ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 10 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 11 Select Remote Linked to Memory in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and enter Yes or select No from the EVIC and enter Yes Refer to the Customer Programm
212. four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 14 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road con ditions and do not switch off the ESP or TCS 15 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator 16 High Beam Light E This light shows that the headlights are on high beam Pull the turn signal lever towards the steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low beam 17 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This light shows when the front fog lights are ON 18 Seat Belt Reminder Light When th
213. from the ignition the transmission gear selector lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against un wanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children or pets inside a vehicle CAUTION Before moving the gear selector lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition from LOCK OFF to ON so The following indicators should be used to ensure that the steering wheel and gear selector lever are re you have engaged the transmission gear selector lever leased Otherwise damage to the steering column or into the PARK position gear selector lever could result 334 STARTING AND OPERATING ME REVERSE Shift the gear selector lever into this gear only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Shift the gear selector lever into this gear only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop DRIVE OVERDRIVE The transmission has only PRND shift positions Down shifts are carried out by an electronic gear select By moving the lever while in the DRIVE position the instrument cluster will display transmission gear selec tion as 6 5 4 3 2 1 for six speed and 4 3 2 1 for four speed transmissions PARKING BRAKE When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application Before leaving the vehicl
214. fuel is added 3 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control system If a prob lem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the gear selector is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come ON when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 4 Voltage Light This light monitors the electrical system voltage The light should turn on momentarily as the engine is started If the light stays on or turns on while driving it indicates a problem with the charging system Immediate service should be obtained ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 5 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and d inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
215. g in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to ensure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scald ing or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your 458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spill
216. ght remains on after the approximately four to six second interval e The light comes on and remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to approximately five seconds of specific vehicle data parameters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag de ployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deployment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler Cor
217. greater than 25 mph 40 km h once and the CRUISE indicator light located in the message window of the odometer will illuminate show ing the electronic speed control system is on To turn the system OFF push the ON OFF button again and the system and indicator will turn off WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidently SET the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always 81bc4c2c leave the system OFF when you aren t using it Electronic Speed Control Switches 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TO SET AT A DESIRED SPEED When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET lever downward and then release Lift your foot off the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed TO DEACTIVATE A soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the lever CANCEL toward you will deactivate the speed control without erasing the set speed memory Pushing the ON OFF button to the OFF position or turning OFF the ignition erases the set speed memory TO RESUME SPEED To resume a previously set speed raise the lever RESUME ACCEL upwards and release Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph 40 km h TO VARY THE SPEED SETTING When the speed control is SET speed can be increased by raising and holding the lever RESUME ACCEL up wards When released a new set speed will be esta
218. hat mode 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL PANEL Mode 7 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow BI LEVEL Mode Zs Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature in any conditions other than full cold or full hot between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions FLOOR Mode Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount through the defrost and side window demist outlets MIX Mode Pe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield DEFROST Mode W Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use DEFROST mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX and DEFROST or a blend of these modes even if the A C SNOWFLAKE button is not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 RECIRCULATION Control e In c
219. he lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be repro grammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering wheel lock This lock prevents steering the vehicle with out the FOB Integrated Key FOBIK If the steering wheel is moved no more than one half turn in either direction and the FOBIK is not in the ignition switch the steering wheel will lock If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel With the engine running turn the steering wheel upside down turn off the engine and remove the FOBIK Turn the steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock engages To Release The Steering Wheel Lock Insert the FOBIK into the ignition switch and START the engine If the FOBIK is difficult to turn move the wheel slightly to the right or left to disengage the lock ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the
220. he recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS EXHAUST GAS WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow the safety tips below Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If itis necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed WARNING If you are required to drive with the deck lid liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE INSIDE THE VEHICLE Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system ee THINGS TO KNOW B
221. heel and Column Instrument Panel Seat Belt Reminder Light Knee Impact Bolster Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioners Front Seat Track Position Sensors e Supplemental Seat Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC If Equipped e Front Seat Side mounted Thorax Airbags If Equipped Front Seat Airbag Features The front airbag system has dual stage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output appro priate to the level of crash severity as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC and the impact sensors at the front of the car The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment The timing of the second stage determines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet the need the second stage is expended later in the crash event ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Driver Airbag Special Features Driver airbag deployment and force level is controlled by the driver s seat position as well as impact severity Use of special inflators result in a very compact driver s side airbag In addition to the small size the inflating gases exit through strategically placed vents which direct the gas away from the occupant Front Passenger Airbag Special Features A new active venting front passenger airbag is designed to reduce the risk of occupants who may be out of position by the use of active ve
222. hen you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure TRIP FUNCTIONS Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC Press the STEP button to scroll through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will displ
223. hes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires NOTE The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are regulated under one of the following licenses yeaa cece ass ate EEC a aoe aa KR55120123 2671 5120123 United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 3L amp 3 8L Gasoline Engine If Equipped All engines are designed to me
224. hicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469 heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use Mopar Wheel Cleaner 05066247AB or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mopar or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Interior Care Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Cleaning Interior Trim Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a
225. hicles without Anti Lock Brakes ABS have a height sensing proportioning valve Installing a leveling system will render this system ineffective inappro priately reducing rear brake pressure resulting in increased stopping distances You could have a seri ous accident UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bl Instrument Panels And Controls 225 Bi Base Instrument Cluster Gas 226 Bl Premium Instrument Cluster Gas 227 Bi Instrument Cluster Descriptions 228 ll Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC If Equipped a 22523 esos ENNEA 240 CMTC Odometer Display 241 CMTC Reset Button 2 00 241 Trip Odometer ODO 0 0 242 Compass Temperature Display lll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped EVIC Displays Trip Functions Compass Display Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Bl Radio General Information Radio Broadcast Signals 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME lll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX Jack 00205 254 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 254 Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 263 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files
226. hild seat or infant carrier in the Swivel n Go seat while it is in the rearward facing position e The swivel seat should be locked in the forward position when using any child seat or infant carriers with the vehicle in motion WARNING Failure to comply with the following conditions could result in serious injury or even death e Occupants riding in Swivel n Go seating must be wearing their seat belt and the seat must be locked in either the forward or rearward position e Make sure the Swivel n Go seat is in a locked position with the handle down Test the seat after it is locked to see that it doesn t swivel 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M REMOVING SWIVEL N GO PREMIUM SEATING IF EQUIPPED 1 Remove any obstructions from the floor behind the seat and stow the Third Row Seat 2 Pull up on the release bar located at the bottom front edge of the seat 3 From behind the seat lift up on the rear of the seat cushion while pulling the seat in a rearward direction 4 Remove the seat from vehicle through the liftgate Rollers are part of the seat frame and will ease the removal process 5 Lower the release handle located at the bottom front edge of the seat Each seat weighs about 90 lbs 81 kg NOTE Electrical contacts for the available heated seats automatically disengage or engage as the seat is removed or installed The contacts slide past each other as the seat is rol
227. hile in courtesy mode for added convenience 81bb8b85 Overhead Compartment Features 1 Storage DVD 2 Rear HVAC 3 Interior Lights 4 Storage 5 Storage 6 Storage DVD 7 Interior Lights 8 Halo Lighting es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 Rear Courtesy Reading Lights As Equipped The overhead console had two sets of courtesy lights The lights turn on when a front door a sliding door or the liftgate is opened If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the transmitter is pressed The courtesy lights also function as reading lights Press in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle Press a second time to turn the each light off You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the outside ring which is identified with four directional arrows Rear Console Halo Lighting The rear overhead console features recessed halo lighting around the perimeter of the console base This feature provides additional lighting options while traveling and is controlled by the headlight switch Refer to Halo Lights If Equipped under Lighting in the Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle in Section 2 GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates
228. hill turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle BRAKE SYSTEM erake Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic D brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still function However there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle In addition if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the hydraulic system the brake warning indicator will turn on as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 WARNING e Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot rest ing or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dan gerous A significant decrease in braking perfor man
229. his switch to lock or unlock the doors locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden tally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key PEN or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the key 81b785ce Driver Power Door Locks 1 UNLOCK 2 LOCK 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 81bb70c3 Front Passenger Power Door Switch Features 1 Window OPEN CLOSE 3 Doors LOCK 2 Doors UNLOCK If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding door is open the sliding door will lock LOCK DOORS AUTOMATICALLY IF EQUIPPED If this feature is enabled your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the following procedure e On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Personal Settings in the EVIC section of this manual e On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the follow ing steps 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 3 Place the key into the ignition 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the key from
230. hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one con
231. id damage from contact with the front seat tracks which have minimal clearance to the cover es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 CENTER AND REAR OVERHEAD CONSOLE RONNAN STORAGE IF EQUIPPED The overhead storage system comes in several options In an accident serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched e Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion Do not operate the storage bin covers while the vehicle is in motion Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down 81bb8b85 Overhead Console Features 1 DVD 5 Storage 2 Rear HVAC 6 DVD 3 Courtesy Lights 7 Courtesy Lights 4 Storage 8 Halo Lighting 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M REMOVABLE FLOOR CONSOLE WITH STOW N GO SEATING IF EQUIPPED The removable floor console has two power outlets storage tray light removable cell phone holder tissue holder pen holder and a map holder It can be removed from the vehicle by pulling the release handle inside the floor console To remove the console use the following procedure 1 Open the console lid and remove the storage tray 2 Pull up on the release handle located inside the floor console and slide the console rearward to disengage from the floor 3 Remove the floor console To reinstall the console u
232. iggered in moderate to severe side collisions In certain types of collisions both the front and side airbags may be trig gered However even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to the section on Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properl
233. ight as a percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires e Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire 402 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tread Wear Indicators for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to the Tires General Infor mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits ee STARTING AND OPERATING 403 Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes
234. iler s axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Ve hicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements WARNING An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking per formance and could result in an accident Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with an autho rized hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable authorized Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 395 EXAMPLE ONLY EXAMPLE ONLY FIG 3 IMPROPER ADJUSTMENT INCORRECT ren FIG 2 WITH WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION CORRECT g1pasoat Weight Distributing Hitch System Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATIONS Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 lbs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See an authorized dealer for
235. ill close fully then stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof WARNING Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Ignition OFF Operation The power sunroof switch will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature Auto Express with Anti Pinch Protection During express closing anytime an obstacle that restricts glass movement is detected the motor will stop and reverse travel to avoid pinching the object Auto Express will stop and reverse travel up to three times in succession After the third time Auto Express will enter a manual operation mode This allows the operator to manually control the power switch in order to close or open the sunroof in case of a malfunction Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs ee UND
236. ill only close the liftgate This button cannot be used to open the liftgate 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING During power operation personal injury or cargo damage may occur Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away NOTE If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets sufficient resistance There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate opening Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position e The power liftgate must be in the full open or close positions for any of the buttons to operate If the liftgate is not in the full open or close positions it must be opened or closed manually If the liftgate release button is activated while the power liftgate is closing the liftgate will reverse to the full open position The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the transmission gear selector lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below 12 F 24 C or temperatures above 143 F 62 C Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the lifteate before pressing any of the power liftgate buttons en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 e
237. illuminate the instru ment cluster AIRBAG warning light if a malfunction is noted The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away Front and Side Impact Sensors Impact Sensors trigger airbag deployment in front and side impacts and aid the ORC in determining appropri ate response to impact events Additional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification Acceleration Sensors Acceleration Sensors trigger airbag deployment based on dramatic acceleration change of the vehicle E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Pressure Sensors Pressure Sensors trigger airbag deployment based on door cavity pressure changes Rollover Sensors Rollover Sensors trigger airbag deployment in the event of vehicle rollover and aid the ORC in deploying Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for rollover events Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped The ORC deploys the SABIC during collision with other vehicles and during collisions where the impact is con fined to a particular area of the vehicle such as collisions with poles trees or similar objects It will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle NOTE The ORC does detect and protect for rollover when equipped with SABIC airbags
238. imized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the drivers seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this happens the connec tion can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu Redial Towing Emergency En9lish Phonebook edia A e mergenc Espanol oneboo Francais Last Enter Number Number on Phone is redialed See Setup Phonebook Flowchart Flowchart Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Note Available Voice
239. in the floor consoles and three more are located in the third row quarter trim panel a INSTRUMENT PANEL CUPHOLDERS The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull out drawer just above the lower storage bin Sun Screen Extended To lower the sun screen gently lift the tab upwards to disengage the hooks and feed the screen back into the base sill 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Cupholders Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops and place the container to be held in either one of the cupholder wells The cup holders are designed to accommodate a wide variety of container types and sizes Press down on the container to engage the cup holder retention fingers INTERIOR BOTTLE HOLDERS There are four bottle holders located in the interior One bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trim panels and one bottle holder is molded into each side sliding interior door trim panel Each holder accommo dates up to 20 oz 6 L size plastic bottles Two outboard mesh pockets on intermediate seating The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes toys games or MP3 players etc SMOKER S PACKAGE KIT IF EQUIPPED With the optional authorized dealer installed Smoker s Package a removable ash receiver is inserted into one of the two cup holders in the center front instrument panel To install the ash receiver align the receiver so the thumb grip on the lid is facing rea
240. ing Light 233 339 Anti Theft System i e fe ether dad dat 19 Appearance Care 4a s ead eek Head ha RR d 466 ASHAY ote ee dedo ande HG e e 202 Assistance lowing sas ke him Spaad 120 Audio Systems Radio 282 285 Auto Down Power Windows 43 Auto Up Power Windows 43 196 nn INDEX 515 Automatic Dimming Mirror 103 Automatic Door Locks 0 00005 36 37 Automatic Headlights 04 166 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 310 Automatic Transaxle 0 2 0 0 00 eee eee 329 Adding Pld uses sapai e Re a 464 Fluid Level Check 0 0 0 0 0 00000 464 Interlock System llle 19 331 Reset Mode 00 cee ee eee 331 Selection Of Lubricant 463 494 Shifting zai or sds idsi ene end 332 Special Additives llle 466 Automatic Transmission 463 466 Adding Fluid iilii 464 466 Fluid and Filter Changes Ls 466 Fluid Change s rea dpa Daea euas aE aaa 466 Fluid Level Check cos poteter T oeae awa 464 Fid Type seien ae ne ace E 463 494 Ball JOINTS 0 ce e Roe UR Macks wa ds a a d 452 Battery a u AG Poa eo et eae dietes 447 Gas Caution a dace d dee Era beg alk bas 448 Jump Starting 6 eee 424 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 27 Saving Feature Protection 169 Be arin i ECT m 466 Belts Drive lt 4 viae ab aa ou ERR Y
241. ing and holding the left secondary pushbutton Trip Odometer ODO This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the right button on the instru ment cluster to switch from odometer to trip A or trip B Press and hold the right button while the odometer trip odometer is displayed to reset Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last reset Compass Temperature Display Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings In order to ensure compass accuracy the com pass variance should be properly set according to the compass variance map zone that the vehicle is in NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where the compass sensor is located es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 To Set the Variance NOTE Refer to the Compass Variance Map in the following Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC section for your Zone Value Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector lever in the PARK position Press and hold approxi mately ten seconds the CMTC reset button until the current variance zone number is displayed To ch
242. ing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will no longer flash the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message will not be present and a pressure value will be dis played instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals mH 3 Accumulation of excessive snow and or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors NOTE 1 The compact spare tire if equipped does not have a TPMS Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 376 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will remain ON a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic display 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display das
243. ing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear TIRE CHAINS Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer NOTE Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire 366 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precau tions Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspen sion components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Broken chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about one half mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 45 mph 70 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle If chains are used on an All Wheel Drive AWD vehicle they should be used on all four tires Do not drive for prolonged periods of time on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if differ ent than the speed recommended by the vehicle manufacturer NOTE I
244. ining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 6 Firmly press and release the Learn or Training button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming a Single Homelink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming Homelink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps GATE OPERATOR CANADIAN PROGRAMMING Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of
245. inu ing to step 3 3 Press and release the memory SET S button located on the driver s door A chime will sound signaling that you are in the memory set mode 4 Within five seconds press and release Memory Button 1 on the driver s door A chime will sound signaling to you that the driver memory has been set 5 Within five seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter A chime will sound signaling to you that the transmitter link has been successfully disabled To disable another transmitter linked to either Memory Position repeat steps 1 to 5 for each transmitter NOTE Once programmed all transmitters linked to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time Refer to the Remote Linked to Memory Customer Pro grammable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC for more information TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the hood release lever located on the instrument panel below the steering column es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 2 Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the center of the hood opening Locate then push the safety catch lever to the right while raising the hood at the same time Hood Safety Catch Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position 81bc4a2d To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood
246. ion cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI connector which is located in the glove box on some vehicles This location may vary with vehicle Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle system this may take a few seconds to connect the vehicle brand logo appears on the iPod display and it starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode the iPod audio track if available from iPod will start playing over the vehicle audio system Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod will be in Play mode In Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data TUNE SCROLL Knob Use the TUNE SCROLL knob to go to the next or previous track The TUNE SCROLL knob functions similar to the scroll wheel on the iPod mobile digital device ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list and turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track RW Rewind Button Press and h
247. ion in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445 CATALYTIC CONVERTER The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you p
248. ion other than OFF or AUTO the lights will turn OFF automatically until the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight switch The battery protection feature will be disabled if the ignition switch is turned to any other position other than LOCK during the three minute delay MULTIFUNCTION LEVER The multifunction control lever is located on the left side of the steering column The Multifunction Lever assembly controls e Turn Signals e Headlamp Low and High Beams e Flash to Pass Optical Horn e Front and Rear Wiper Washer functions TURN SIGNALS Move the Multifunction Lever up or down to signal a right hand or left hand turn The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes to indicate the direction of the turn and proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside turn signal light bulb If one of the indicators fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator light is defective You may manually signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down Turn Signal Switch Turn Signal Auto Mode Tap the multifunction control lever once and the turn signal left or right will flash three times and automati cally turn off Turn Signal Warning If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled at over 18 mph 29 km h
249. ipped If desired the Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock feature can be turned on and off by performing the following procedure 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Press the UNLOCK button for five to ten seconds 3 While the UNLOCK button is pressed after five seconds press the LOCK button Release both buttons The Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure or by performing the procedure in the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC Customer Programmable Features section on vehicles so equipped The table below explains the Lamp Flash options Function Which Turn Number of Signal Lamps Flashes Lock All 1 Unlock 1st Press Left Side 2 Unlock All All 2 Doors Left Side Left Side 2 Right Side Right Side 2 Liftgate All 2 Programming Additional RKE Transmitters Refer to SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM Customer Key Programming ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Replacing the RKE Transmitter Battery The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate NOTE Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Battery access is
250. iption service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account at no addi tional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Cana dian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With RES REQ Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio ON press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will di
251. ire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control 362 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or continuously for longer than 30 seconds without stopping when you are stuck Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual for additional information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced ORN TIRE NEW TIR n HA These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced ee STARTING AND OPERATING 363 Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point Tire Life The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying fac
252. ire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 359 Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure buildup or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment information or an authorized tire dealer fo
253. is a single switch on the front passenger s door ing the bar switch just below the power window trim panel which operates the passenger door window switches and locks and unlocks all doors The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position and during power accessory delay Power Window Lockout Switch 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position 81bb70c3 Front Passenger Power Switches 1 Window OPEN CLOSE 3 Doors UNLOCK SR 2 Doors LOCK Sliding Door Power Window Switch Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch NOTE Please note that the sliding door windows do Second Row passengers may power the sliding door not fully recline stopping several inches above the window by a single switch on the door handle assembly window sill E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Auto Down Feature If Equipped The left and right front window switch may be equipped with an auto down feature Press the window switch past the detent release and the window will go down auto matically To open the window part way press the window switch part way and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for up to 90 seconds depending on the accessory delay setting after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cance
254. isc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within y jecte SC e emove CAUTION 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it only The use of other sized discs may damage the A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF CD player mechanism a VEMM NOTE EBjecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped umm SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the of the current selection or return to the beginning of the other side is a CD should not be used and they previous selection if the CD is within the first second of can cause damage to the player the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD MP3 modes Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam th
255. itch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch has no function in this mode CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If a disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching a disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store a disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose a disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store a disc where temperatures may become too high 8 Do not play discs that are small in size or have irregular shapes 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se CLIMATE CONTROLS The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the temperature amount and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio MANUAL HEATING VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING HVAC SYSTEM The controls for the manual HVAC system in this v
256. ith a child restraint tether anchor located on the lower rear of the front passenger seat Use this tether anchor to secure only forward facing child restraints equipped with an upper tether strap ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 WARNING Rearward facing infant restraints must never be se cured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag In an accident a passenger airbag may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants riding in rearward facing infant restraints Restraining Infants and Small Children with Seat Delete Feature Commercial Vehicles Only There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Use the restraint that is correct for your child e The rearward facing infant carrier is for babies weigh ing up to about 20 lbs 9 kg and less than one year old THIS TYPE OF SEAT CANNOT BE USED IN A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DE LETE FEATURE Commercial Vehicles Only The forward facing child seat is for children from about 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and more than one year old A convertible child seat one that is designed to be used for children who are too heavy for a rearward facing infant seat may be used IN THE FORWARD FACING POSITION ONLY IT MUST NEVER BE INSTALLED FACING TO THE REAR IN A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DELETE FEA TURE Commercial Vehicles O
257. ith each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump tion 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the face of the driver s door or on the driver s side B pillar 358 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al 811adOdO Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the t
258. itions exist the following odometer messages will display CHAngE OIL kun Oil Change Required CRUISE bead ROSE Cruise Activated dOOE edis fet eph EO ed hens Door Ajar ESPOFE 2r Rs ESP Deactivated BADIE 2244 hoe ces bei Xu Lift Gate Ajar SASCAP oie aces on OXON Fuel Cap Fault WOOO i5 2 eee somes ohne te e rn Hood Ajar NOPUSE 422 2249 4 DRE Y es ad bad Fuse Fault LoCOOL RR ERES Low Coolant LoWASH mae Rete Low Washer Fluid These messages can be manually turned off by pressing the right reset button on the instrument cluster CMTC Reset Button CMTC Reset Button Secondary Reset Button Press the left reset button to scroll through sub menus i e Trip Functions AVG Fuel Economy DTE Elapsed Time and Units When the appropriate conditions exist the following messages will display in the window below the speed ometer NE Eight point compass headings are displayed N S E W NE NW SE SW 14 Ry 68 pe Ses Temperature Fahrenheit or Celsius AVG Average Fuel Economy U S or Metric DDE te Sian dank quete RS Distance to Empty EL 2 du pia dre Mba deas KESEN Elapsed Time Poach od bate ee eae eae aes Park Assist On Off 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Should this wrench symbol display with the letter P next to it your Park Assist System needs servicing Contact your authorized dealer NOTE Temperature and Average Fuel Economy can be changed from U S or Metric by press
259. k TPM System Refer to Tire Pressure Monitor ing System in Section 5 of this manual e Turn Signal On e RKE Battery Low e LOW WASHER FLUID e Oil Change Required Left Front Turn Signal Light Out e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out e Right Front Turn Signal Light Out e Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out e Park Assist Disabled e Service Park Assist System e Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Menu button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates w
260. l AUTO Mode The rear system automatically maintains the correct mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occu pants FLOOR Mode Air comes from the floor outlets BI LEVEL Mode Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the BI LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets HEADLINER Mode Air comes from the outlets in the headliner Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow SUMMER OPERATION The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A 50 solution of ethylene ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended Refer to section 7 Maintenance Procedures of this manual for proper coolant selection WINTER OPERATION To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor mance make sure the engine cooling system is function ing properly and the proper amount type and concen tration of coolant is used Refer to section 7 Maintenance Procedures of this manual for proper coolant selection Use of the air RECIRCULATION mode during winter months is not recommended because
261. l The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection A 20 gigabyte HDD allows uploads of music and photos from CDs or through the USB port The Gracenote database finds the artist track and title for the music An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a portable MP3 player through the vehicle s speakers For vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System VES separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen to the vehicle speakers while different audio tracks play es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 through the system s wireless headphones This means rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional rear seat entertainment system while the driver and front seat passenger listen to the radio Other special features include direct tune music type selections easy store presets backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera and on some models a dual display screen operation Refer to your radio specific user s manual for detailed operating in structions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio lf Equipped Refer to your Radio specific user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 For Hands Free Phone Communication UConnect Voice Recognition System VR refer to Hands Free Communicati
262. l features include direct tune music type selections traffic messaging optional easy store presets parental lockout for VES if equipped backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera and on some models a dual display screen operation Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 Clock Setting Procedure The GPS receiver in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen If the words Time GPS Time are displayed at the top of the screen proceed to Step 4 Otherwise proceed to Step 3 3 If the words Time User Clock are displayed at the top of the screen touch the bottom of the screen where the words User Clock are displayed The GPS
263. l knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digit Character format types Program Type Display Program Type iae read ed TE Display Public Public No program type or Nowe Rhythm and Blues R amp B undefined ser IE Xd Religious Music Rel Musc E n t Religious Talk Rel Talk assica Mn Rock Rock C asic Roc C ce Soft Soft College College Soft Rock Soft Rck County Country Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B For
264. l penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected ENGINE OIL Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX
265. l this feature Auto Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped The left and right front window switch may be equipped with an auto up feature Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then stop Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms hands fingers and all objects from the window path before closing Auto Up Reset If Equipped To reactivate the Auto Up feature perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored 1 Pull the window switch up to close window com pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to
266. lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle If this doesn t help move the child to the center rear seating position and use the lap belt Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 WARNING Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint Improper installation can lead to failure of an e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it infant or child restraint It could come loose in a has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety collision The child could be badly injured or Standards We also recommend that you make sure killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle actly when installing an infant or child restraint where you will use it before you buy it A rearward facing child restraint should only be e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re weight and height Check the label on the restraint for straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy weight and height limits
267. le due to the radio frequency noises of the system Open Close Power Liftgate If Equipped Press the LIFTGATE button twice within five seconds to open close the power liftgate The liftgate will beep for three seconds and then open close If the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power closed the liftgate will reverse to the full open position If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a powered liftgate pressing the button twice will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the liftgate area The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by pressing the button located on the overhead console If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear pillar pushing once will close the liftgate only The liftgate cannot be opened from this switch Open Close Power Left Power Sliding Door If Equipped Press the LEFT button twice within five seconds to open close the left power sliding door If the button is pushed while the door is being power closed the door will reverse to the full open position 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Open Close Power Right Power Sliding Door If Equipped Press the RIGHT button twice within five seconds to open close the right power sliding door If the button is pushed while the door is being power closed the door will reverse to the full open position Turn Off Flash Lights With RKE LOCK If Equ
268. led to and from the strikers When reinstalling the seat make certain to lower the release handle to ensure the seat is latched securely WARNING In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments Always be sure the seats are fully latched ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Swivel n Go Premium Seating Table If The table and leg are stored beneath the floor when not in Equipped use To install the table follow these steps The Swivel n Go Seating Table consists of an easily assembled post and top Second Row Seating and Table 1 Swivel the second row seats so they are facing the rear Second Row Seating and Table 2 Open the floor tub in front of the second row seats 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 81bd165c Table and Leg Storage Inserting Table Pole Into Base 3 Obtain the pole and table top by loosening the hook 1 Table Base 2 Lock Release Button and loop straps 5 Twist the pole in a clockwise rotation until it stops 4 Insert pole into base by aligning the lock button into Note You will hear an audible click when the lock notch of the base button engages the base es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 6 Place the table top over the installed pole aligning with the mating feature of the underside of the table top WARNING Apply pressure on the table top and
269. ler Cap Message H Flexible Fuel 3 3L Engines Only E 85 General Information Ethanol Fuel E 85 Fuel Requirements Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles FFV E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles Starting Cruising Range Replacement Parts Maintenance li Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label EN STARTING AND OPERATING 325 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 388 Trailer Hitch Classifications 395 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 388 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Tire Size i e 389 a a dia ehe sai Chea etai dits ae oe a 389 Trailer And Trailer Tongue Weight 399 Inflation Pressure lille 389 TOWING NOQIUREITED ISI u tenes sd tees a re 400 Curb Weight iiis 389 TOWN PISS t us tabe ath Wied tea iu us Overloading 0 0 0 cece cece eee ees 389 lll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 407 mH Loadi 390 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Oading eu cb pati ed e d E EA E ee Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The a Ter Towing cz t Dex M na 392 Ground Sese be stimei adar abere seres 407 Common Towing Definitions 392 326 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep in you
270. lite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle between Artist Song Title and Composer if available information Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the p
271. location Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 7 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right using the swivel wrench Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 8 Remove the wheel lug nuts for vehicles with wheel covers remove the cover from the wheel by hand Do not pry the wheel cover off Then pull the wheel off the hub 9 Install the compact spare tire Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered NOTE Do not install the wheel cover on the compact spare Do not use a hammer or force to install the wheel covers en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 421 10 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 11 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft Ibs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 12
272. locking mechanism to the Locked position and then pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover Bibdi664 1 Bin Latch 3 Seatback Release 2 Storage Pocket ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Storage Bin Cover Lock Release Second Row Seatback Release Lever 3 Pull up on the seatback recliner lever located on the 4 Pull rearward on the release strap located at the rear of outboard side of the seat and fold the seatback down To the seat and tumble the seat forward into the storage bin assure the seatback is latched in the folded position additional downward pressure on the seatback may be required when folding 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks which have minimal clearance to the cover Second Row Seat Release Strap 5 Close the storage bin cover es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 2 Pull up on the handle to lift the seat out of the storage 1 P 8 WARNING bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors In an accident serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched e Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion Do not operate the storage bin covers while the vehicle is in motion Do not use
273. lure You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing underhood services or immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system failure 462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type WARNING Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire WARNING Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or is unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid c
274. ly discarded in your area ENGINE OIL FILTER The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended 7 44 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M DRIVE BELT At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule replace the drive belt with a new drive belt NOTE The belt must be routed correctly to ensure proper drive function SPARK PLUGS Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New plugs should be in stalled at the specified mileage The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata lytic converter For proper type of replacement spark plugs refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct spark plug type ENGINE AIR CLEANER Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for engine air cleaner filter maintenance inter vals NOTE Be sure to follow the dusty or off road condi tions maintenance interval if applicable WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protect
275. ma eM ane ok 233 AMG LOCK 5 uva vues i RE eo ee es 233 339 Automatic Headlights 0 166 BackUp nue bid i ee oP aw eS 486 Battery SAVET usines aeee oe aU Rede eee 169 Brake Assist Warning 20 343 Brake Watning ese RR Rem 232 Bulb Replacement 481 482 Center Mounted Stop lille 488 Daytime Running see eruten 0 00000 eee 166 Dimmer Switch Headlight 164 173 Engine Temperature Warning 231 ID Aa rtp m 168 234 485 Hazard Warning Flasher 4 410 Headlight Switch 0000 166 Headlights usro 0 0 e E eee 482 Headlights On Reminder 168 HIgh Beam eese d meni Ea ou eo 173 High Beam Indicator s coteta ei nats 234 High Beam Low Beam Select 170 173 Ill minated Entry 24 04 8442s 2 ei sagin 21 niu PT 163 164 LICENSE 5 25 Bore preteka M pinnes 489 Lights On Reminder ss sisese kodagan tate 168 Low Fuel oaoa ouaaa aaa ta 228 HO 524 INDEX MM Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 235 Oil Pressure uade cr ers dup ees 231 Parkoziseseness etc dE Een Ru ner 166 483 Passing 6 eee 171 173 Reading e osceutetescoe RU ea oa EO e e ee 185 Rear Servicing oue sch te ES uem et en 486 Rear Tail 22e m ema Rer 486 Seat Belt Reminder 00000 234 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 233 Service cuu i ang o goa dca e ORTU OR TRES 481 482 Service Engine Soon Malfunction In
276. me you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Menu button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 27 Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC Display Button Press the left reset button to scroll through sub menus i e Trip Functions AVG Fuel Economy DTE Elapsed Time and Units 28 Fuel Door Reminder The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the lt Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the vehicle COMPASS MINI TRIP COMPUTER CMTC IF EQUIPPED NOTE The compass on your vehicle is self calibrating eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass The Compass Mini Trip Computer features a driver interactive display displays information on outside tem perature compass direction and trip information It is located in the instrument cluster below the Speedometer es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 CMTC Odometer Display When the appropriate cond
277. ments Progress around the bolt circle tightening the nut opposite to the nut just previously tightened until final torque is achieved Recommended torque is 95 ft lbs 130 N m Secure The Spare Tire As Follows 1 To stow the compact spare tire cover assembly on vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating assemble the winch handle extensions to form a T and fit the winch T handle over the drive nut Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops turning freely This will allow enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the wheel spacer out from under the vehicle WARNING A loose compact spare tire cover assembly thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the com pact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place provided CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the winch T handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 423 2 Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the Spare Tire Hook and pull the wheel spacer from under the vehicle 3 Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is down and place the tire into the spare tire cover assem bly Slide the wheel spacer through the center of the wheel and spare tire cover assembly so that the two retainer tabs snap out and engage the spare tire cover on the opposite side
278. meter shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined 26 CMTC or EVIC Display As Equipped CMTC Display If Equipped On vehicles equipped with CMTC the display provides the outside temperature one of eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing and the current radio station Refer to Compass Mini Trip Com puter later in this section EVIC Display If Equipped The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the lower half of the speedometer Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each ti
279. mitter After all the doors are locked and closed the security telltale light in the instru ment cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the system is arming The security telltale light in the instrument panel 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set After the alarm is set the security telltale light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed NOTE If the security telltale light stays on continuously during vehicle operation have the system checked by your authorized dealer To Disarm the System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the system e The system remains armed during liftgate entry Press ing the liftgate button will not disarm the system If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the system is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred the system will arm regardless of whether you
280. mportant to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected The Heated Mirrors Lower Instrument Panel Power Outlet and Removable Floor Console when in the front position are fused with self resetting fuses that are only serviceable by an authorized dealer The power seats are fused by a 30 Amp circuit breaker located under the driver s seat The Power Windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit breaker located under the instrument panel near the steering column If you experience temporary or permanent loss of these systems see your authorized dealer for service VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may do the following e Remove the 20 Amp mini fuse in the Integrated Power Module labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service for two weeks or more run the air conditioning ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481 system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again REPLAC
281. n UConnect If Equipped 286 System VES If Equipped Clock Setting Procedure 287 W Universal Consumer Interface UCI If Bi Satellite Radio If Equipped Equipped 52 53 e 4254 rare ere tiia REN REQ RER RES Reu Radios Only 289 Connecting The iPod Device System Activation s ce eae a ae 289 Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons 294 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Play Mode e eres ERES 294 Number EON PSI euis saieas ed sten edt ld List Or Browse Mode esses 296 Selecting Satellite Mode 290 B Sirius Backseat Tv If Equipped 298 Satellite Antenna s cie peperere rinit eres 290 ll Video Entertainment System VES If Reception Quality ss roa seet a aa e a ea 290 Equipped ss nite ee eee e E eR 298 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME li Radio Operation And Cellular Phones lll Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped Radio Operation 0 0 000000 CD Player slat ak ow RPM ERR E CD DVD Disc Maintenance Mi Climate Controls 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 Manual Heating Ventilation And Air Conditioning Hvac System Rear Manual Climate Control Zone If Equipped cusemdoce sani a eode tow s Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped sast anos acras etos e S Rog deus 300
282. n the LOCK OFF or ON positions NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service Reset Mode Electronic Transmission The transmission is monitored electronically for abnor mal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transmission automatically shifts into third gear and remains in third gear despite the forward gear selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission In the event that the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears e Stop the vehicle and shift the gear selector lever into PARK e Turn the key to OFF then restart the engine 332 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e Shift the gear selector lever into the desired gear and resume driving NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset it is recommended that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your an authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting the gear selector lever from PARK or NEUTRAL p
283. n memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ E c radios only with UConnect For sales code REN touch screen radio refer to the separate User s Manual This feature allows you to plug an iPod mobile digital device into the vehicle s sound system through a connec tor UCI connector using an optional connection cable available through MOPAR See your authorized dealer for details 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Using this feature e the iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata Track Title Artist Al bum etc information display on radio e the iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e the iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector Connecting The iPod Device Use the optional connect
284. n order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during Winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle es STARTING AND OPERATING 367 Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressi
285. n pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo a
286. nd damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 of this manual for proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 second intervals at one time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second intervals of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the Normal Starting procedure should be repeated After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
287. nd luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of 354 STARTING AND OPERATING ME available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capaci ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 kg Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s from Tire Placard weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ib 100 Ibs 80 Ibs 865 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING 355 AVAILABLE
288. nds are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Metha nol MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasolines Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives are not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel 380 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded
289. nect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recog nition button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system follow the instructions de scribed in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted say List
290. ng If you have two valid RKE transmitters with integrated keys you can program new transmitters to the system by performing the following steps 1 Insert the first valid integrated key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 2 Insert the second valid integrated key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 3 Insert a blank integrated key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new integrated key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter with inte grated key contact your authorized dealer for details 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent t
291. ng Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without st
292. ng conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER TIN The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highwa
293. ng service for the vehicle Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica tions the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions engine performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components ee STARTING AND OPERATING 379 Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol ble
294. nings will be displayed in the Compass Mini Trip Computer Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display Area under the Speedometer 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Refer to Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC If Equipped later in this section for more information CHAngE OIL Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer Display reset button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 25 Odometer The odo
295. nly When a convert ible seat is properly installed facing forward the vehicle seat should be adjusted to the rear most position Children more than 40 Ibs 18 kg should be secured in the passenger seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat with the seat adjusted to the rear most position Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se should ride properly buckled in the passenger seat with the seat adjusted to the rear most position Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm Tether Installation For Commercial Vehicles With Rear Seat Delete To secure the child restraint upper tether strap to the vehicle follow the instructions shown 1 Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat 2 Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions for proper use of connecting the child restraint to the extended tether strap 3 Route the tether strap under the head rest NOTE Ensure that the child restraint tether strap is centered between the headrest supports underneath the head rest 4 Using the hook attached to the child restraint tether strap attach the child restraint tether strap to the metal anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat 5 Following the child seat manufacturer s instructions tighten the child restraint tether
296. nt lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you PARK and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the Fob and integrated key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death SLIDING SIDE DOOR CHILD PROTECTION LOCK To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the sliding doors are equipped with a child protection door lock system Sliding Door Lock Features 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE When the child lock system is engaged the door T can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock 1 Open the sliding side door 2 Slide the child lock control inward toward the ve hicle to engage the Child Protection Door Lock 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door Child Protection Door Lock Refer to Sliding Side Door later in this section for detailed Child Protection Door Lock instructions en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 POWER DOOR LOCKS IF EQUIPPED If you press the power door lock switch while the key is A power door lock switch is on each front door trim in the ignition and any front door is open the power panel Use t
297. nt imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations dia grams and charts 510 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ME e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete
298. nts positioned on each side of the airbag Supplemental Front Seat Mounted Thorax Side Airbags If Equipped Front seat mounted side Thorax airbags provide en hanced protection and work together with supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to help protect an occupant during a side impact The seat mounted side airbag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard side of the seat 819b6e91 Thorax Airbag Label When the airbag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each airbag 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se deploys independently that is a left side impact deploys the left airbag only and a right side impact deploys only the right airbag WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbag inflation capability may be compromised The protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC Airbags offer side impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provide
299. o clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seatbelt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the seatbelts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the seatbelts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the seatbelts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cup Holders Remo
300. o require the airbags to inflate Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic ORC deploys the front airbags side inflatable airbag curtains side seat thorax airbags and front seat belt pretensioners as re quired for each type of impact The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position These include all of the components listed above except the steering wheel and column instrument panel and seat belt reminder light If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you The ORC contains a backup power supply system that will deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning 9 light in the instrument panel for approximately d four to six seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the AIRBAG warning light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up It also includes diagnostics that will
301. oceed to Step 5 Programming A Rolling Code Sys tem 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light proceed to Step 5 Pro gramming A Rolling Code System 5 Programming A Rolling Code System At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button To program the rema
302. of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc TRACTION When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy m 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep the tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop 346 STARTING AND OPERATING ME DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flowing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your pass
303. oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Compartment illustration in this section Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 4 0 Liter Engines SAE 10W 30 engine oil is preferred for all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443 Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad ditives Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact an authorized dealer authorized service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safe
304. old or damp weather the use of the RECIRCULA Press this button to choose TION mode will cause windows to fog on the inside between outside air intake or because of moisture build up inside the vehicle For recirculation of the air inside maximum defogging select the Outside Air position the vehicle A lamp will illu minate when you are in RE CIRCULATION mode Only use the RECIRCULATION mode to temporarily block e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb s1b9af17 out any outside odors smoke ing the mode control selection or dust and to cool the inte rior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather In order to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to PANEL the A C will engage automatically Air Outlets The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned ON or OFF to NOTE control airflow e Continuous use of the RECIRCULATION mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear the center instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear seat passengers 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M ECONOMY Mode If ECONOMY mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the indicator light and the A C compressor Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem perature Air Conditioning Op
305. old the RW button to move backward in the current track Holding the RW button long enough will take you back to the beginning of the current track Pressing and releasing the RW button will go back five seconds of the current track FF Fast Forward Button Press and hold the FF button to move forward in the current track Pressing and releasing the FF button will go forward five seconds of the current track SEEK Buttons Use the SEEK buttons to move to the previous or the next track If the left down button is pressed during the first two seconds of the current track it will go back to the previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the current track it will go back to the beginning of the track If the right up button is pressed during Play mode it will go to the next track in the list INFO Button Press the INFO button while a track is playing to see the information Track Title Artist Album etc for that track Each press of the INFO button will take you to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME of the screens the last press of the INFO button will take you back to the Play mode screen on the radio REPEAT Button Press the REPEAT button to repeat the current playing track SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button will play the first five seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song
306. olution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean DRIVER S OUTSIDE MIRROR AUTO DIMMER IF EQUIPPED This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn this feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the Rearview Mirror OUTSIDE MIRRORS To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in a passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side mirror EXTERIOR MIRRORS FOLDING FEATURE All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal POWER REMOTE MIRRORS IF EQUIPPED Use the mirror select switch located on the driver s door trim panel to adjust the view obtained in the outside mirrors Press the switch to the L eft or R ight for mirror selection Press the mirror sele
307. omputer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Bit Rate KBBS 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 450451 92 12 905 80 64 56 48 l 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 545505 16 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 56 48 WMA Sampling i Specification Frequency kHz Bip Rale kbp 48 64 96 128 WMA 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are suppo
308. on Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is r
309. on UConnect9 in Section 3 Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 Clock Setting Procedure Setting the Clock 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Sho
310. on the bottom release handle in the front of the console e Lift the rear of the console up several inches e Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove console To reinstall the console e Position the console at a slight angle rear slightly higher than the front Console Position 4 e Pulling up on the top storage tray gains access to the top storage area e Slide the console forward into the floor bracket en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 e Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting STORAGE O he Moge rocket GLOVE COMPARTMENTS e Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated in the rear floor bracket EOR Upper Glove Compartment e Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched Tepen the upper compartment Lb pies nadon release button 2 The door will spring open about one WARNING inch Manually lift the front edge of the door upward In an accident serious injury could result if the Until fully opened and the detent is engaged There are both upper and lower glove compartments removable floor console is not properly installed Always be sure the removable floor console is fully latched To close the compartment door push firmly downward on the door s surface to release the detent and latch the door closed 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS DOOR TRIM PANEL STORAGE Front Door Storage Both interior front door panels have multiple
311. oning and load limiting retractors for the front seat belts Advanced multistage driver and new active vent front passenger airbags An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee Bolsters Blockers for front seat occupants Front seat belt retractors incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 All seat belt systems except the driver s Swivel n Go and third row center position include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are If you will be carrying children too small for adult size buckled up properly seat belts your seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver NOTE The front airbags have a multistage inflator and cause a collision that includes
312. ons until the engine is fully warmed up Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel con sumption You can expect your MPG and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts ee STARTING AND OPERATING 387 VEHICLE LOADING CAUTION As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol istration Regulations your vehicle has a certification compatible components can damage your vehicle label affixed to the driver s side door or pillar Maintenance If you operate the vehicle using E 85 fuel follow the maintenance schedule section of this manual CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability 811adOdO Vehicle Certification Label Location If seats are removed for carrying cargo do not exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR 388 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to the driver s door pillar The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufactur
313. ontamination from foreign matter or moisture ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463 CAUTION Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid all brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE The automatic transaxle and differential assembly are contained within a single housing The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transaxle and the fluid All Four Speed automatic transaxles are equipped with a conventional filler tube and dipstick If fluid is added it should be added through the filler tube NOTE Your vehicle s transmission may be equipped with a capped dipstick tube it is sealed and should not be tampered with Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance Use only manufacturers recommended transaxle fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type It is important that the transaxle fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid 464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Using a transaxle fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in trans axle
314. opping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3
315. opriate for the steering wheel position ESP ON This is the normal operating mode for ESP on 2WD vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESP should only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below ESP Partial OFF This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch located in the center stack lower switch bank just above the radio When in Partial OFF mode the TCS portion of ESP except for the limited slip feature de scribed in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illu minated All other stability features of the ESP function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP ON mode of operation ESP OFF ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial OFF mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial OFF mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESP BAS Warning
316. orces won t be reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your P abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Third Row Center Shoulder Belt Instructions The shoulder belt for the third row center seat is located over the head and slightly behind the passenger Pull this strap down and secure it to the latch plate of the lap belt and then
317. orts Information Inform Talk Talk Jazz Jazz Top 40 Top 40 News News Weather Weather Nostalgia Nostalga By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon Oldies Oldies is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Personality Persnlty station with the same selected Music Type name The Public Public Music Type function only operates when in the FM Rhythm and Blues R amp B mode Religious Music Rel Musc If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Religious Talk Rel Talk Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be Rock Rock exited and the radio will tune to the preset station ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM modes SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the st
318. osition NOTE The key must be out of the ignition switch or the ignition switch must be in the OFF position for this feature to operate 81bc4a9b Headlight Switch Assembly INTERIOR LIGHTS Interior lights are turned ON when a door or liftgate is opened the keyless entry transmitter is activated or when the dimmer control is moved to the extreme top 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent extreme top position to turn ON the interior lights except the front reading courtesy lights The interior lights will remain ON when the dimmer control is in this position Interior light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the OFF position extreme bottom The inte rior lights will remain OFF when the doors or liftgate are open 81bc85ef 81bc85ec Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control to the first detent This feature brightens the odometer radio and overhead dis plays when the park lights or head lights are ON 81bc85ee Dimmer Control With the park lights or headlights ON rotating the dimmer control for the interior lights ON the instrument panel upward will increase the bright ness of the instrument panel lights 81bc85f0 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 HALO Lights If Equipped Halo Lights are strategically placed soft lighting that helps
319. ositions into another gear range PARK Shifting the gear selector lever in PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this gear Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this gear Always apply the parking brake first and then place the gear selector lever in the PARK position Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this gear WARNING Never use PARK position on an automatic transmis sion as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage en STARTING AND OPERATING 333 WARNING e When shifting the gear selector lever into PARK i depress the button on the gear selector lever and firmly move the lever all the way forward until it Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure stops those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is Look at the shift indicator window on the console to running Before exiting a vehicle you should always ensure gear selector lever is in the PARK position shift the gear selector lever into PARK remove the e When engaged in PARK you will not be able to move the gear selector lever rearward without depressing the gear selector lever button key from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed
320. other CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio to the Radio mode es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names nn e Level 1 12 including a separator character extension and a three mm e Level 2 31 including a separator character extension and a three Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and c
321. ove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply Mopar Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products Cleaning High Gloss Front Door and Pillar Appliques When cleaning the front door B pillar appliques care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Remove all dirt with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners Glass cleaners are not recommended If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 To maintain the high gloss shine apply a scratch and swirl remover onto a damp cloth and apply to door ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 applique Rub the applique with a firm pressure then buff lightly with a clean cotton cloth until a high gloss shine is achieved Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lightweight and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass head lights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material t
322. ove the compact spare tire cover assembly from under the vehicle or a Winch T Handle to raise lower the compact spare tire cover assembly 414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Spare Tire Hook Handle Stow n Go Tools Winch T 814acba6 Preparations For Jacking Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoid ice or slippery areas set the parking brake and place the gear selector in PARK Turn OFF the ignition e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher e Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally oppo site the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel BLOCKA e Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Jacking Instructions SBS Jack Warning Label WARNING i a Hj Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in park a manual transmission in reverse WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 415 WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone
323. owing Rising or Shallow Standing Water ice ede dh ene ER aR 346 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 298 E 85 Fuel ecce er i re pire dG ans 383 Electric Remote Mirrors 00 105 Electrical Power Outlets 00 197 Electronic Brake Control System 339 Brake Assist System llli 341 Electronic Stability Program 341 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 181 Electronic Stability Program ESP 341 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 244 Emergency In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher 410 PACKING ca c redes eee Patina dX ae doris 412 415 Jump Starting obese eis recem dae ER es 424 Overheating cusan ce area de aaa 410 Emission Control System Maintenance 437 496 en INDEX 519 Engine usc etre Sire eee ide aye es 95 434 435 AurCleane f sociz dai ek dod ele Ae ede nei 444 Block Heater 0 0 ccc eee eee es 329 Break In Recommendations 95 Checking Oil Level 00000000 440 Compartment 6 6 0c ee eee eee 434 435 Coolant Antifreeze 0 0000 493 Coblifig aec Ip td edenhnaeehes 454 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 55 381 Flooded Starting 000 328 Fuel Requirements 0 377 491 Oil iu Sede bare veau e wba beds 440 491 493 Oil Change Interval 000 441 Oil Disposal xis ete ye eue 443 Oil Filler Cap
324. owing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission is only permitted within the limitations described in this section Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow a front wheel drive vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B 3 8L Engine Compartment 434 E 4 0L Engine Compartment 435 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 436 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Gascap 437 H Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs 2 0 43 9x3 63 pe RIA aded 437 Bl Replacement Parts 00000 439 Bl Authorized Dealer Service 439 Bl Maintenance Procedures 00005 440 Engine Olli scere ey mde RR es 440 Engine Oil Filter sese errem Rr 443 Drive Belt cs ERI ERI R3 444 Spark Plugs cse Mette ed e hee Ced Engine Air Cleaner Catalytic Converter Maintenance Free Battery 447 Air Conditioner Maintenance 449 Power Steering Fluid Check 451 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Front Suspension Ball Joints 452 Steering Shaft Seal
325. perational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the U S NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance cover age details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour
326. placed Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Limited Use Spare Tire If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare t
327. poration and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corporation such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers govern ment officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler Corporation regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the U S govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corporation to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes s
328. press downward Note You will hear an audible click when the table latch engages the pole Failure to comply with the following conditions could result in serious injury or even death DO NOT install the table while vehicle is in motion NEVER drive the vehicle with only the pole in stalled DO NOT place heavy or sharp objects on table DO NOT place liquid drinks on the table use available cupholders Second Row seats must be locked in the rearward facing position before installing the table 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To separate the table top from the leg follow these steps 1 Locate the release latch on the underside of the table top 81bd165d Table Top Release 2 Pull horizontally on the latch to activate the release from the pole 3 While pulling on the latch pull upward to remove the table top from the pole NOTE The table top should be removed from the leg prior to removing the leg from its mounting base 4 Locate the release button on the pole Press the release button firmly to activate the release from the base 5 While pressing the release button twist the pole in a counterclockwise rotation until it stops Pull upward to remove the pole from the base 6 Place the pole on the underside of the table top and secure with the hook and loop straps 7 Once the pole and table top are secured you may place them in the floor tub in front of the second row sea
329. ptions at any prompt if you ask for help 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the PHONE button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone Owner s Manual The UConnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to UConnect system pairing instructions e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a n
330. push rearward on the seatback until it latches Always ensure that it is In the event of a collision you could be injured if the fully latched seat is not fully latched 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SWIVEL N GO PREMIUM SEATING IF EQUIPPED Premium second row Swivel n Go Seating features include e Large and plush seatback and seat bottom cushions e A table that installs between the second and third row seats The table disassembles and stows in the hidden second row floor storage bin e Seats rotate to face forward or rearward 81bd1663 e Seat belts are integrated into the swivel seats Premium Second Row Seat Features e Dual folding armrests 1 Seat Release 4 Seatback Release A side storage pocket that will accommodate a phone 2 Fore Aft Adjustment 5 Moveable Armrest 3 Swivel Release or hand held game To swivel the seat Pull the lower handle on the outboard e Seats are removable side of the seat and push the side of the seatback to begin ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 rotation Once the seat begins to rotate the handle may be released The seat locks in position once reaching the forward or rearward positions only Seatbacks fold forward on an angle not flat This allows the seats to swivel when the seatbacks are folded WARNING Failure to comply with the following conditions could result in serious injury or even death e Never place any c
331. r CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specification Samplin e Ci Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affecte
332. r Full Size Tire Vehicle damage may result engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 425 WARNING When jump starting proceed as follows m l 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth inadvertent electrical contact ing Don t lean over battery when attaching WARNING clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contami Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever nated area immediately with large quantities of water the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam switch is ON You can be hurt by the fan mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts 2 When a boost is provided by a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach and without letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake place the automatic transmission selector lever into PARK and
333. r and then push to select es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In
334. r car Accidents can be caused by inadvertently STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING e Never leave unattended children alone in a ve hicle Leaving children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death moving the gear selection lever Accidents can also be caused by pressing the accelerator pedal This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system resulting in overheating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries Automatic Transmission The gear selector lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Depress the brake pedal before shifting into any driving gear Normal Starting Above 32 F 0 C 1 Do not depress the accelerator ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 2 Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine i
335. r on a pager You can also send stored UConnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the Voice Recognition button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The UConnect system will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations this is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready p
336. r outlets If ECONOMY mode is desired press the SNOWFLAKE button to turn OFF the SNOWFLAKE mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A C system Note If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select DEFROST mode and increase blower speed RECIRCULATION Control When outside air contains smoke odors or Q amp high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION mode control button RECIRCULATION mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation symbol will illuminate in the display when this button is selected Push the button UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 a second time to turn OFF the RECIRCULATION mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of the RECIRCULATION mode may lead to excessive window fogging The RE CIRCULATION mode is not allowed in the FLOOR MIX and DEFROST modes to improve window clearing op eration Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected Rear Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped The Rear ATC System has floor air outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating positions The system provides heated air through the floor outlets or cool dehumidified air through the headliner outlets 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR IN
337. r recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle at or above maximum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h 360 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or 6 in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be re
338. r separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 514 INDEX MM Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze Adding Fuel Adding Washer Fluid sess drast aetas tiia 453 Additives Fuel Adjustable Pedals Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 444 Air Conditioner Maintenance 449 Air Conditioning lt 0 0 4 rate tren 302 Air Conditioning Controls 302 Air Conditioning Filter llus 320 450 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 320 Air Conditioning Rear Zone 308 315 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 449 Air Conditioning System 302 310 449 Air Conditioning System Zone Control 306 Air Pressure Tires 2 0 0 0 000 eee eee 357 Airbag enis RP LRRRMRDRPSHPS APIS 69 77 Airbag Deployment 00000000 77 Airbag Light 4 24 erret ies 70 76 80 97 235 Airbag Maintenance e ecse randas asean ee eee 79 Airbag olde 2 ase do a ait eee Gl TAS es 71 75 77 Airbag Window Side Curtain 72 75 77 Alarm Light csc cc eme Reve ees 233 Alarm Security Alarm llle 19 Alignment and Balance 04 365 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio ls 290 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 455 456 491 Disposal as entera reete is aci tente Rog HER kg 457 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 337 Anti Lock Warn
339. rallel to the rack frame Once the crossbar is in place retighten the thumb screws to lock the crossbar into position Attempt to move the crossbar again to ensure that it has properly locked into position NOTE To help control wind noise when installing the crossbars make sure the arrows marked on the underside of the crossbars are facing the front of the vehicle When the crossbars are not in use the front crossbar should be fastened just forward of the middle support and the rear crossbar should be fastened at the rearmost position of the side rails This will help reduce the amount of wind noise when the crossbars are not in use The tie down holes on the crossbar ends should always be used to tie down the load Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached CAUTION e Crossbars should remain equally spaced or paral lel at any luggage rack position for proper func tion Noncompliance could result in damage to the luggage rack cargo and or vehicle To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 Ibs 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as secure the load appropriately possible and 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION WARNING e Long loads which extend over the windshield Cargo must be securely tied before driving your such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with vehicle Improperl
340. ration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn on the ignition switch 2 Press the MENU button until Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features menu is reached 3 Press the STEP button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC 4 Press and release the RESET button to start the cali bration The CAL indicator will be displayed in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings For the most accurate compass performance the compass variance must be set using the following procedure NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where the compass sensor is located 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME COMPASS VARIANCE MAP 8000cbab 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the compass button for approximately two seconds 3 Press the STEP button until Compass Variance mes sage and the last variance zone number displays in the EV
341. re vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPMS Warning Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi 207 kPa but the TPMS Warning Light will still be ON In this situation the TPMS Warning Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure value damage may result when using replacement equip ment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 370 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent mois ture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPMS SENSOR NOTE The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is
342. re exu 452 Tilt Column uium m eR EESE S 173 Wheel Lock e2es 9 RR e a os 18 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Control iig beers he mb Re e LS PI ET 300 DLOLABE od hea donee CR eR de Na RO Roa 209 480 Storage Din ecse xac deme es aE Ee 209 Storage Vehicle 4 eraat eR edens 319 480 Storing Your Vehicle escac cetita ese Piret 480 Stow n Go Fold in Floor Seats 140 Sun Roof cs exe pue s rie 194 HO 530 INDEX ee Sun Visor Extension 0 000 eee iana 106 Sunglasses StOrage i eere eS ed S 186 Sunroof Maintenance 000000 ea 197 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 69 Synthetic Engine Oil 2 2 0 0 0000 its 443 System Navigation 00000050 285 System Remote Starting ereina 28 Tachometer lus er Rr Ree 234 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 310 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 235 411 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 88 Tilt Steering Column 000005 173 Nip Start sectas owe eae Ae hee eS HR RENE 14 Tire and Loading Information Placard 352 Tire Identification Number TIN 351 Tire Markings ius 4409 4 REY RR pis 348 Tire Safety Information 04 348 TIPES rese Roe oie di t cn p a s 97 356 510 Aging Life of Tires cases ara kie aka aeaa 363 Air Pressure 4293 3C 25 403 0 356 Alignment 4 Eve cea ath dana ao atk aed 365 Chains aeg eder beg eae EGER 3
343. re molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 Tire Sizing Chart TIRE SIZING TERMS Size Designation P Passenger Car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger Car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 350 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TIRE SIZING TERMS Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load correspond ing to its load index under certain operati
344. rease as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural air pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold tire placard pressure in order for the TPMS warning lamp to be turned off The system will automatically update and the TPMS warning lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information es STARTING AND OPERATING 369 For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours tire pressure of CAUTION 35 psi 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C The TPMS has been optimized for the original and Ihe measured tre pres no i AU per PO Kaia equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire been established for the tire size equipped on your pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This ti
345. ren It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle Installing the Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether anchorages Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Not all child restraint
346. rene eara der MIS 228 Speedometer cesse cep e en d noy sasas 231 Tachometer ee ens 234 Gearshift 3 23 9d E er den deb Ro bade ee qd 332 General Information 18 28 133 376 Glass Cleaning 43 sese rtp e A71 Grocery Bag Retainer llle 157 Gross Axle Weight Rating 388 393 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 388 392 Hands Free Phone UConnect 107 285 286 Hard Drive HDD osarete r a coe ee es 282 285 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 6 0 morra eee 346 Hazard Warning Flasher 5 410 Head Restraints 0 0 6 adieren a 135 Headlights sa i ginen agea tonei eee 166 Bulb Replacement css ccs est pisete titas 482 Cleaning acie eked nok Shoah we ERE 471 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 170 173 Lights On Reminder 000 168 Passing 558 9 pA PA oe e eA 173 Replacing ac cs uae sm oh x RR ed RR eae 482 Time Delay i543 eee bowl ER Rs 167 522 INDEX ME Heated Seats es e ace Mae ae POE DR 136 Heatef 2 2299 e RE en 302 Heater Engine Block 0 0006 329 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 173 Hitches Trailer Towing HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 187 Hood Release ele 160 Hook Coat sex Le RE owe eee Sa E 215 HOSES xerit EE RUM EY WES Ee aos 459 TENHON i cesdasee e 39e Baoan e a eden d eR 14 E 12 14 Ignition Key Removal
347. right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the gear selector lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON RUN position and the brake pedal is depressed SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the system provides both audible and visual signals For the first three minutes the horn will sound and the headlights and security telltale light will flash repeatedly For an additional 15 minutes only the headlights and security telltale will flash The engine will run only if a valid key is used to start the vehicle Rearming of the System The security system will rearm itself after the 15 addi tional minutes of headlights and security telltale light flashing if the system has not been disabled If the condition which initiated the alarm is still present the system will ignore that condition and monitor the re maining doors and ignition To Arm the System Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press a power door lock switch while the driver or passenger door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans
348. ring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accu mulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from Wf the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Windshield and Rear Window Washers The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared It is located in the engine 454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se compartment and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution After the engine has warmed op
349. ring this programming procedure 3 Insert the key into the ignition switch 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK position to the ON RUN position a minimum of four times ending in the LOCK position Do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door lock switch in the UNLOCK direction 6 A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has been changed 7 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps 8 If a chime is not heard the program mode was canceled before the feature could be changed If neces sary repeat the above procedure The UNLOCK Doors Automatically On Exit feature can be reactivated by repeating the above mentioned proce dure or by performing the procedure in the EVIC Customer Programmable Features section on vehicles so equipped NOTE Use the LOCK Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h and UNLOCK Doors Automatically On Exit features in accordance with local laws REMOTE POWER UNLOCK ON FIRST PRESS IF EQUIPPED This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s side door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the transmitter ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 The Remote UNLOCK feature can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Press the LOCK button for five to ten seconds 3 While the LOCK button is pr
350. rmation e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 4568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 507 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
351. rnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or fuel power steering fluid trans mission fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS la Mittors aer aaan eee oes YE AAA 103 W Hands Free Communication UConnect If Inside Day Night Mirror 103 ESPET sinter ety a eranen ines d Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 103 Operation ssa hiec eee ee dade Ra 109 Driver s Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer T Phone Call Features sees 116 EQUIP POG ise eerie A ice ure e p e dogs 104 UConnect System Features 118 Outside Mirrors llle 104 Advanced Phone Connectivity 123 Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature 105 Things You Should Know About Your Power Remote Mirrors If Equipped 105 UConnect System 00 20 0000 e ee 125 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 106 General Information 05 133 Deals ena ete es oe ee EET 133 100 Manual Front And Second Row Seat Adjuster 8 Way Driver s Power Seat If Equipped Adjustable Head Restraints Heated Seats If Equipped Manual Reclining Seats If Equipped Manual Lumbar Lever
352. rogram format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutto
353. rompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dial ing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the UCon
354. rrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES ACCELERATION Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control
355. rted for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button rep
356. rward Press the ash receiver into either of the cup wells to secure Pull upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning and or storage es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accom modate a second ash receiver if desired CONSOLE FEATURES There are two consoles available Basic and Premium BASIC CONSOLE e The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to easily pass through the first row to the second e Four Cup Holders accept up to extra large size bever age cups or 20 oz 6 L plastic bottles Cup Holders are dishwasher safe for cleaning 81c27779 Basic Console Features e A Top Storage Tray 1 Console Anchor 3 Front Cup Holders e The Cup Holders Tray Top is removable to accessa 2 10P Tray Ae Rear Cup Holdes large storage bin e The Basic Console is removable from the vehicle for additional floor space by removing the cap at the console base 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee 81c27778 Console Base Features 1 Anchor Cover 2 Console Base Removal of Basic Floor Console e Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip e Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to clear the rear load floor hook Remove the console To reinstall the console Position the console at a slight angle front slightly higher than the rear Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket hook
357. s Dial by Saying a Number e Press the PHONE button to begin Call by Saying a Name e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook in this section The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the phonebook is recom mended when the vehicle is not in motion Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired
358. s NOTE SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska Refer to your Video Entertainment System VES RER Navigation or REN Multimedia User Manuals for de tailed operating instructions VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF EQUIPPED The optional VES Video Entertainment System is available with e One or two video screens e Additional single disc DVD player with two screen system Battery powered two channel remote control e Two remote headphones Integrated remote storage in either screen location e Three different medias can be played simultaneously Cabin speakers and Headphone Channels 1 and 2 e Easy menu driven functions on touch screen radios e Video and audio input jacks available in rear seating area ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 e Nine different medias to choose from in each screen AM FM Sirius Radio DVD1 DVD2 Hard Drive Jukebox AUX in radio AUX1 AUX2 The LCD screen s are located in the overhead compart ment console 8161d54e VES Remote Control Location NOTE Refer to your VES User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Overhead Video Screens 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being ON in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating
359. s and other electrical items for correct operation M A l N U E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 499 Required Maintenance Intervals Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 6 000 10 000 6 Rotate Tires 6 000 10 000 6 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner 12 000 20 000 12 filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 12 000 20 000 12 Replace the air conditioning filter 12 000 20 000 12 Inspect the CV Joints Perform the first inspection at M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months UP ipis at Inspect Exhaust System Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months ane isan Bi Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot 24 000 40 000 24 seals replace if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter 30 000 50 000 30 500 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Change the automatic transmission fluid amp filter if using your vehicle for any of the follo
360. s from the CHMSL 1 unit and remove the unit from the liftgate spoiler assembly 5 Replace the CHMSL unit 6 Replace the two screws securing the CHMSL to the spoiler 1 7 Reconnect the electrical connector 8 Install the liftgate spoiler 9 Connect battery negative cable License Light The light for the license plate light is located under the tailgate light bar and above the license plate 1 Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable 2 Using a small screwdriver press inward the locking tab on the outboard side of the light unit and pull down on the light unit for removal 490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 5 Push bulb 2 into light unit 1 socket and install unit 2 into place ensuring the locking tab is secure CS 6 Reconnect the battery negative cable X 6 80a6ade8 License Plate Bulb Change 1 Light Unit 2 Bulb 3 Remove the light assembly from the light bar and handle assembly 4 Remove the bulb 2 from the socket 1 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491 FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel approximate All Engines 20 Gallons 76 Liters Engine Oil with Filter a Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certi 5 0 Quarts 47 Liters du Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certi 5 0 Quarts 47 Liters 4 0L Engine SAE 10W 30 API Certi 5 5 Quarts 52 Liters fied 492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System 3 3L Engine Mopar Antifree
361. s immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine cold the level of the coolant in the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459 Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle mu
362. s running 3 If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Steps 1 3 above NOTE This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift interlocking system The brake pedal must be depressed to shift out of PARK Extremely Cold Weather Starting Below 20 F 29 C Follow the same instructions in the Normal Starting procedure To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended High Altitude Starting Above 4 000 ft 1 219 m Follow the same instructions in the Normal Starting procedure To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended 328 STARTING AND OPERATING Se If The Engine Fails To Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite a
363. s with the Remote Key LOCK features 81bb182e Seven Button Transmitter Fob With Integrated Key Remote UNLOCK Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors and liftgate The illuminated entry system also turns on Remote UNLOCK On First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s side door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the transmitter e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Remote UNLOCK feature can be enabled or disabled by per forming the following procedure 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Press the LOCK button for five to ten seconds 3 While the LOCK button is pressed after five seconds press the UNLOCK button Release both buttons The Remote Key Unlock feature can be reactivated by repeating the above procedure or by performing the procedure in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features section on vehicles so equipped Remote LOCK Doors And Liftgate Press and release
364. se the following procedure 1 Open the console lid and remove the storage tray 2 Pull up on the release handle and slide the console forward to engage the front of the console into the floor tray 3 Pivot the floor console down until it is seated on the floor tray and release the handle 4 Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly attached 81bb8b83 Removable Floor Console Features 1 Removal Latch 2 Lower Latch 3 Upper Latch 4 Front Cupholders 5 Top Tray 6 Rear Cupholders ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 WARNING In an accident serious injury could result if the removable floor console is not properly installed Always be sure the removable floor console is fully latched REAR COMPARTMENT STORAGE BINS Your vehicle is equipped with open storage areas located in each rear trim pane 8 SILDHDTE Third Row Rear Seat and Rear Compartment Features 1 Tie Down 5 Liftgate Close 2 Rear Switches 6 Bag Holders 3 Tire Jack Handle 7 LATCH Anchor 4 Cubby Speaker 8 Flash Light COAT HOOKS Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second and third row seating positions The coat hook load limit 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M is 10 lbs 4 5 kg Exceeding the recommended load limit can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the vehicle CARGO AREA STORAGE The seats in your vehicle are in line whi
365. sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change 416 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard warning flasher 1 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 2 To remove the compact spare tire cover assembly assemble the winch handle extensions to form a T and fit the winch T handle over the drive nut Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops turning freely This will allow enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the winch T handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch 3 Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the Spare Tire Hook and pull the compact spare tire cover assembly from under the vehicle ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 417 WARNING Getting under a jacked up vehicl
366. snap into the buckle Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seats and the second row outboard seats the shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck The upper anchorage can be adjusted upward by pushing anywhere on the anchorage To move the an chorage downward squeeze the actuation buttons while simultaneously pushing down on the anchorage assem bly As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use The Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger seating position Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How To Use The Au
367. sole closed with four cup holders and a convenient storage tray 81c27ac2 Premium Console Features 1 Top Release 3 Console Release 2 Center Release The top and center console sections slide forward and rearward to provide added user comfort Four cup hold ers each of which can accommodate large sized fast food Console Position 1 beverage containers A one piece cup holder insert for es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large Dual Storage Bins storage area below Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a rearward position This is accomplished by lifting the upper most latch at the front of the console This provides easy access to the storage area below and provides two of the four cup holders for the second row passengers ISS SRS Console Position 2 Console Position 3 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost e The first storage bin can be used to hold smaller items position Again lifting second latch handle at the front of the console allows complete access to a lower storage bin and provides additional cupholders for rear passengers e The lower storage bin includes a molded in coin holder room for CDs DVDs and a power outlet that allows a cell phone to recharge while concealed Removal of Premium Floor Console To remove the console e Pull up
368. splay The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REU RER REN Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will be displayed Selecting Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Satel
369. st also be protected against freezing If frequent coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pres sure tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions HOSES AND VACUUM VAPOR HARNESSES Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any heat source or moving component which may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed 460
370. strap 6 Inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks abrasions discoloration and loose threads If these or any other condition that might effect the performance of the strap is observed DO NOT USE Contact your authorized DaimlerChrysler dealership for a replacement part ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 WARNING The vehicle tether anchor is designed to be used with a child restraint only It should not be used for any other purpose Before use inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks abrasions discoloration and loose threads If these or any other condition that might effect the performance of the strap is observed DO NOT USE Personal injury may result Contact your authorized DaimlerChrysler dealership for a replace ment part ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 mi 500 km After the initial 60 mi 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For t
371. sual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The UConnect system will play all the o
372. systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts REAR SEAT DELETE FEATURE COMMERCIAL VEHICLES ONLY IF EQUIPPED Commercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as a family vehicle and are not intended for carrying children in the front passenger seat However if you must carry a child in a vehicle without a rear seat the passenger seat should be moved to the full rearward position and the child must be in a proper restraint system based on it s age size and weight NEVER carry a child in a rear facing infant carrier in a vehicle without rear seats In an accident serious injury or death may occur from the deploying passenger airbag 81ce4b6b Commercial Child Restraint Tether Anchor This vehicle is equipped w
373. t Warning Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancies Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and stow it ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is
374. t can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas vehicle on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit Jack Location The jack jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area Turn the two cover latches to release the cover ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 413 8 81bb8b7e Rear Compartment Features 1 Tie Down 2 Switch Bank 3 Tire Jack Handle 4 Cubby Speaker 5 Liftgate Close Switch 6 Bag Holders 7 Child Seat LATCH Anchor 8 Rechargeable Flash Light Remove the pouch containing the scissors jack jack handle and tools Spare Tire Removal For vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating the spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover located under the center of the vehicle by means of a cable winch mecha nism The spare tire drive nut is located on the floor under a plastic cap at the front of the floor console NOTE The base console if equipped must be removed to raise and lower the spare tire Refer to Console Features in Section 3 for the console removal procedure The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be as sembled into a Spare Tire Hook to rem
375. t use additional rust inhibitors or anti rust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based coolants Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This coolant can be used up to five years or 102 000 mi 170 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT coolant When adding coolant a minimum solution of 50 rec ommended Mopar Antifreeze Coolant Five Year 100 000 mi 160 934 km Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent in water should be used Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water engine coolant solution es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457 The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurrin
376. te the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration Note that neither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been exceeded Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle en STARTING AND OPERATING 391 808cf051 LOADING TABLE EXAMPLE ONLY Front Axle Rear Axle Empty Weight 2 140 lbs 1 470 lbs 971 kg 667 kg Load Driver passengers 360 lbs 980 Ibs and cargo luggage 163 kg 445 kg LOADING TABLE EXAMPLE ONLY Front Axle Rear Axle TOTAL 2 500 Ibs 2 450 lbs 1 134 kg 1 111 kg GAWR 2 544 Ibs 2 544 lbs 1 154 kg 1 154 kg A loaded vehicle is shown in the above table Note that neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been exceeded m NOTE Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label at tached to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWR s This table is only an example 392 STARTING AND OPERATING Se TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a
377. ters or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the additional part is physically held against the trans mitter being used to start the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interfer ence with this system All of the RKE transmitters provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only RKE transmitters that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a transmitter is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE trans mitters Duplication of RKE transmitters may be per formed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure This procedure consists of ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 programming a blank transmitter to the vehicle electron ics A blank transmitter is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle RKE transmitters with you to the authorized dealer Customer Key Programmi
378. the LOCK position to the ON RUN position a minimum of four times ending in the LOCK position Do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door lock switch in the LOCK direction 6 Asingle chime will be heard to indicate the feature has been disabled 7 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps 8 If a chime is not heard the program mode was canceled before the feature could be disabled If neces sary repeat the above procedure The Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h feature can be reactivated by repeating the above men tioned procedure or by performing the procedure in the EVIC Customer Programmable Features section on ve hicles so equipped UNLOCK DOORS AUTOMATICALLY ON EXIT IF EQUIPPED This feature UNLOCKS all of the doors of the vehicle when any door is opened This will occur only after the gear selector lever has been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle has been driven the gear selector lever has been shifted out of PARK and all doors closed This feature will not operate if there is any manual operation of the power door locks LOCK or UNLOCK 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The UNLOCK Doors Automatically On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chimes that may be confusing du
379. the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate The horn will chirp once to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn With Remote Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the transmitter If desired the Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock feature can be turned on and off by performing the following procedure 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Press the LOCK button for five to ten seconds 3 While the LOCK button is pressed after five seconds press the PANIC button Release both buttons The Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure or by performing the procedure in the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC Customer Programmable Features section on vehicles so equipped en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Using The PANIC Alarm To turn the PANIC Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and release When the PANIC Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The PANIC Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or by turning the ignition switch to the ON position NOTE When you turn off the PANIC Alarm by press ing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehic
380. the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when th
381. the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCRO
382. the steering wheel The adjust able pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position The switch is located on the left side of the steering column 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx e The pedals can be adjusted while driving e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys tem is ON The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In formation System EVIC if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out Adjust able Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or Adjustable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse CAUTION Adjustable Pedal Switch Press the button forward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim Press the button rearward to move the pedals rearward ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the toward the driver adjustable pedal s path Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED TO ACTIVATE When engaged this device takes over the accelerator Push the ON OFF button located in the end of the lever operation at speeds
383. the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability NOTE Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsi bility to maintain correct tire pressure even if underin flation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously ill
384. the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch STARTING AND OPERATING 399 TOW HEIGHT 81546c40 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e Trailer tongue weight e Weight of any other type of cargo luggage or equip ment put in or on your vehicle e Weight of the driver and all passengers 400 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle TOWING REQUIREMENTS To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 mi 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle e During the first 500 mi 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings en STARTING AND OPERAT
385. the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461 cracking tears cuts abrasion and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE Often fluid such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera tions to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings Therefore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be noted before hose is re placed based on leakage NOTE Inspection of brake hoses should be performed whenever the brake system is serviced and every engine oil change Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface cracking scuffing or worn spots If there is any evidence of cracking scuffing or worn spots the hose should be replaced immediately Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake fai
386. time setting menu will appear on the screen 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Setting the User Clock If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the system clock you can manually adjust the time by performing the following 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen If the words Time User Clock are displayed at the top of the screen proceed to Step 4 Otherwise proceed to Step 3 3 If the words Time GPS Time are displayed at the top of the screen touch the bot
387. to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three of which are detented and one spring loaded The detented positions are OFF ACC and ON The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When re leased from the START position the switch automatically returns to the detented ON position WIN Ignition Positions ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Integrated Ignition Key The integrated ignition key operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter and a valet key which stores in the rear of the transmitter The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the transmitter go dead The valet key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the valet key with you when valet parking To remove the valet key from the transmitter slide the mechanical latch at the top of the transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 81bb182d Valet Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided valet key into the lock cylinder with either side up 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Tip Start Feature 1 Do not press the accelerator pedal during this process 2 Insert the integrated ignition key into the ignition switch 3 Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run
388. to drive without speed control WARNING can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery Speed Control can be dangerous where the system mm 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M OVERHEAD CONSOLES FRONT OVERHEAD CONSOLES AS EQUIPPED Two versions of the overhead console are available The base front overhead console models feature fixed incan descent courtesy reading lights flip down sunglass stor age and conversation mirror Premium front overhead console models feature a LED focused light that illumi nates the instrument panel cup holders Infrared Auto matic Temperature Control Sensor ATC equipped only two swiveling LED lights flip down sunglass storage conversation mirror optional power sliding door switches and an optional power liftgate switch 81bf7b28 Front Premium Overhead Console Features 1 Cupholder LED 4 Storage Mirror 2 ATC Sensor 5 Switch Bank 3 Interior Lights es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 Switch Bank And Conversation Mirror NOTE To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding doors from the rear seats press the ON OFF button located in the overhead console to disable the switches for the rear seat passengers Courtesy Int
389. to illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants in locating specific features while driving at night To activate the Halo lights push in the Halo pu switch control knob Pressing the switch con trol knob in a second time will turn the Halo lights OFF 81bca4d9 Head Light Switch With Halo EXTERIOR LIGHTS Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down to signal a right hand or left hand turn 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes to indicate the direction of the turn and proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights For additional turn signal operation details see Wind shield Wipers and Washers Multifunction Lever in the next section Parking Lights Da Turn the headlight switch knob to the first detent to turn the park lights ON This also turns ON all instrument panel lighting Daytime Running Lights Canada Fleet Vehicles Only The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except PARK This provides a constant Lights ON condition until the ignition is turned OFF The lights illuminate at less than 50 of normal intensity If the parking brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights DRL will turn OFF Also if a turn signal is activated the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation
390. tom of the screen where the words GPS Time are displayed The user clock time setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES REU RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscr
391. tomatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the front airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the occ
392. tomatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Overhead Console Customer Programmable Features in Section 3 of this manual Rear Blower Control The rear blower control knob can be manually set to OFF or any fixed blower speed by rotating the knob from low to high This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle CAUTION Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature Control System through an intake grille located in the passenger side trim panel behind the third seat The heater outlets are located in the passenger side trim panel just behind the sliding door Do not block or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets The electrical system could overload causing damage to the blower motor 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Rear Temperature Control To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower the temperature and clockwise to increase the tempera ture The REAR temperature settings are displayed in the front ATC control When rear controls are locked by the front system the LOCK symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored Rear Mode Contro
393. tomer programmable feature Refer to the Customer Programmable Features in Section 3 of this manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the front ATC display until the engine warms up The fan will engage immediately if the DEFROST mode is selected or by rotating the blower control to any fixed blower speed Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be turned OFF when the system is being used in the manual mode NOTE Each of these features operate independently from each other If any one feature is controlled manually the remaining features will continue to operate automati cally The left blower control knob can be set to any fixed blower speed by pressing the upper front blower rocker button The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the AUTO mode The operator can also select the direction of the selecting one of the following positions 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME PANEL Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vanes of the center outlets down will close of
394. top the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using
395. tors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Please see Tread Wear Indicators and Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire in this section The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety han dling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment manufacturer or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability 364 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING WARNING Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that e Never use
396. trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS The following trailer towing related definitions will as sist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The gross trailer weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recom mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The gross combination weight rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings in clude a 68 kg 150 Ibs allowance for the presence of a driver ee STARTING AND OPERATING 393 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
397. ts NOTE Always store the table and pole in the floor tub when not in use es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 PLASTIC GROCERY BAG RETAINER HOOKS Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and some front seats The floor supports the partial weight of the bagged goods DRIVER MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Once programmed the Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver s door panel can be used to recall the driver s seat driver s outside mirror adjustable brake and accelerator pedals and radio station preset settings Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters can also be pro grammed to recall the same positions when the UN LOCK button is pressed Driver Memory Seat Switch Your vehicle may have been delivered with two Remote Keyless Entry transmitters One or both transmitters can be linked to either Memory Position The memory system can accommodate up to four transmitters each one linked to either of the two memory positions 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SETTING MEMORY POSITIONS AND LINKING RKE TRANSMITTER TO MEMORY NOTE Each time the SET S button and a numbered button 1 or 2 are pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store a new one 1 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 2 Press the driver door Memory Buttons number 1 if you are setting the memory
398. turn the ignition switch to the OFF position for both vehicles 420 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 3 Turn OFF the heater radio and all unnecessary elec trical loads 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start 6 Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 427 WARNING amount
399. ty System Manual Override 21 Bl Illuminated Entry System If Equipped 21 ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped 22 Using The RKE Transmitter 22 Remote Starting System If Equipped 28 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se How To Use Remote Start 29 l Door Locke cis sans iaa eaa 32 Manual Door Locks 32 Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock 33 Power Door Locks If Equipped 35 Lock Doors Automatically If Equipped 36 Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit If Equipped 5 239 ies Bhs reso andy ee 37 Remote Power Unlock On First Press If Equipped isses eite togae es 38 la Windows serere seed RE XR 39 Power Vent Windows If Equipped 39 Power Windows 0000000005 40 la Sliding Side Door seo dude es 44 Power Sliding Side Door If Equipped 45 Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock 49 Ne CT 51 Power Liftgate If Equipped 52 W Seat Storage Bii uere e e es 55 Seat Storage Bin Safety Warning 55 W Occupant Restraints severe RR 58 Lap Shoulder Belts 00 0 60 Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped 23 0 4 ches tated eee nek eee ead 66 Seat Belt Pretensioners 0 0 66 Enhanced
400. uch as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation DaimlerChrysler Corporation product involving a 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters That May Be Recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Airbag disable light status if equipped e Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle seat belt status e Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 e Engine control status including engine speed e Transmission gear selection e Cruise control status e Traction stability control status e Tire pressure monitoring system status if equipped DaimlerChrysler Corporation Integrated Child Seat If Equipped Operating instructions for the second row bench seat with Integrated Child Seat are included with the seat If the instructions are not with the seat or in the Owner s Manual Package replacement instruction can be ob tained Second Row Bench Seat With Integrated Child Seat To obtain Integrated Child Seat replacement instruc tions Use the ord
401. ult in serious injury or even death 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH later in this section An aftermarket belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belts If the child can not sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Some booster seats are equipped with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap portion Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The
402. uminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly NOTE Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result For additional information on TPMS refer to Section 5 Starting and Operating Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys tem of this manual For additional information on Tire Pressures refer to Section 5 Starting and Operating Tire Inflation Pressures of
403. unications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the UConnect website for supported phones NOTE For UConnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The UConnect phonebook enables you to store up to 32 names with four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase
404. upied driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert Programming BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position DaimlerChrysler does not recom mend deactivating BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position engine does not need to be running and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON RUN position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 60 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Bel
405. urned back ON or the ignition switch is turned ON the delay will be cancelled The driver can choose when exiting the vehicle to have the headlights remain ON for 30 60 or 90 seconds or not remain ON To change the timer setting see a Qualified Dealer Service Technician If the headlights are turned OFF before the ignition they will turn OFF in the normal manner 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The headlights must be turned OFF within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature Front Fog Lights If Equipped O To activate the front fog lights turn ON the park lights or the low beam headlights and push in the headlight switch control knob Pressing the head light switch control knob in a second time will turn the front fog lights OFF 81bca4d8 Fog Light Switch Lights On Reminder If the headlights or the park lights are left on or if the dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the ignition switch is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Battery Protection This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing down the battery if the headlights park lights or front fog lights are left on for extended periods of time when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position After eight minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK posi tion and the headlight switch in any posit
406. uthorized dealer to provide power with the ignition switch in the OFF position 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED A 110 volt 150 watt inverter outlet if equipped con verts DC current to AC current This outlet can be used to power small appliances and electronics Press the switch located in the center stack switch bank to turn the power on to the outlet Press the switch again to turn the power off NOTE When the Inverter Switch is pressed there will be a delay of approximately one second before the inverter status indicator turns ON The status indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is producing AC power NOTE Due to built in overload protection the inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded WARNING To Avoid Serious Injury or Death Do not use a Three Prong Adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 ELECTRICAL OUTLET USE WITH ENGINE OFF CAUTION CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting
407. val Pull the flexible liner from the cup holder drawer starting at one edge to ease removal Cleaning The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe or you may follow the cleaning procedure below Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap Let soak for approximately 30 minutes After 30 minutes pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times This will loosen any remaining debris Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473 Installation FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and press the Cartridge Mini mE liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the Cavity Fuse Fuse Description corresponding openings in the drawer B 40 Amp Rear Door Module RR FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Green Door Node MODULE J4 25 Amp Driver Door Node The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located Natural in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly J5 25 Amp Passenger Door Node This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A Natural label that identifies each component may be printed or J6 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake System embossed on the inside of the cover Green ABS Pump ESP FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRAT
408. vated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low In addition the EVIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right Front Right Rear for three seconds and a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing 374 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 81826bed Low Tire Pressure Display Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure value The system will automatically update the graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flashing and the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure s have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Message The TPMS Telltale Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which TPMS Sensor s is not being received ee STARTING AND OPERATING 375 81826bd7 Check TPM System Display If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat provid
409. ve tread designs such as those on All Season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram TIRE ROTATION PATTERN FRONT OF VEHICLE E E a ES E 4 TIRE ROTATION 80ba79fe 368 STARTING AND OPERATING Se TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the cold inflation tire pressure requirements found on the tire placard located on the driver s side B pillar The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours and in outside ambient temperature Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also inc
410. ver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the RESET button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter To make your selection press and release the RESET button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 Rear Park Assist System If Equipped When ENABLE is selected the Rear Park Assist System is activated When DISABLE is selected the System is deactivated and the instrument cluster will display the PARK ASSIST DISABLED message Display Units of Measure in The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the RESET button until
411. ver out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Brake Transmission Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the gear selector lever out of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed This system is active only while the ignition switch is in the ON position Always press the brake pedal first before moving the gear selector lever out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System For electrical system malfunctions there is an override for the interlock system In order to override this system remove the cover located to the top right of the selector lever in the instrument panel The override can be activated by pressing the white colored tab which can be accessed through the hole in the instrument panel While the override is pressed the gear selector lever can be moved out of the PARK position without pressing the brake pedal After operation return the cover to its original position This system prevents the key from being removed unless the gear selector lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting the gear selector lever out of PARK unless the key is i
412. w Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the multimedia system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed SALES CODE RER MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The RER Multimedia system contains a radio Sirius Satellite Radio player navigation system CD DVD player USB port 20 gigabyte hard drive HDD and th
413. wer is in the REAR position do the second seat occupants have control of the rear blower speed REAR MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL ZONE IF EQUIPPED The Rear Manual Climate Control Zone system has floor air outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and upper outlets The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear seat passengers are located in the headliner near the center of the vehicle 81bc4f92 Rear HVAC Manual Controls 3 Rear HVAC Lock 4 MODE Select 1 Blower 2 Temperature Rear Blower Control The primary control for the rear blower is on the front climate control unit located on the instrument panel ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 Only when the front control for the rear blower is in the RR position do the second seat occupants have control of the rear blower speed The rear blower control located in the rear overhead console has an OFF position and a range of blower speeds This allows the second seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle CAUTION Interior air enters the Manual Rear Zone Climate Control system through an intake grille located in the passenger side trim panel behind the third seat The heater outlets are located in the passenger side trim panel just behind the sliding door Do not block or place o
414. will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc NOTE These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped VES CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the numbe
415. wing police 60 000 100 000 60 taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary 90 000 150 000 90 Flush and replace the engine coolant 102 000 170 000 60 Replace the ignition cables on 3 3L 3 8L engines 102 000 170 000 102 Replace the spark plugs on 3 3L 3 8L 4 0L engines 102 000 170 000 102 Replace the timing belt on 4 0L engines 102 000 170 000 102 Change the automatic transmission fluid amp filter 120 000 200 000 120 Replace Accessory Drive Belt s 120 000 200 000 120 M A l N U E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 501 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle Prepare For The Appointment Prepares A Lists i deis e Gis TRA oid Be Reasonable With Requests MB If You Need Assistance sss DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center s serg gero les DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center MP In Mexi
416. worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Resiraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Seat Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags they are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Airbag Telltale Light Driver Airbag Front Passenger Airbag Front and Side Impact Sensors Steering W
417. y 2 All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate 4 If your vehicle has side airbags do not lean against the door airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front airbag deployment could cause serious injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if a frontal or side collision is severe enough t
418. y of dirt entering the transaxle 5 Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or warm Hot fluid is approximately 180 F 82 C which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has been driven at least 15 miles 24 km The fluid cannot be comfortably held between the finger tips Cold is when the fluid is below 80 F 27 C 6 Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated Remove dipstick and note reading a If the fluid is hot the reading should be in the crosshatched area marked HOT between the upper two holes in the dipstick b If the fluid is cold the fluid level should be between the lower two holes in the area marked COLD If the fluid level indicates low add sufficient fluid to bring to the proper level CAUTION Do not overfill Dirt and water in the transaxle can cause serious damage To prevent dirt and water from entering the transaxle after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is re seated properly 466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Fluid and Filter Changes The Six Speed automatic transaxle AutoStick has been equipped with a capped dipstick tube It is sealed and should not be tampered with See you authorized dealer service department if you wish to have the transmission fluid and filter changed Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for the recommended transaxle fluid and filter change intervals
419. y secured loads can fly off the large frontal area should be secured to both the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per front and rear of the vehicle sonal injury or property damage Follow the Roof Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care k rack fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to a load This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 UMBRELLA HOLDER LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into The automatic load leveling system will provide a level the left front door entry scuff molding riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers onm raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The vehicle must be driven to reset the system Umbrella Holder 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not install the load leveling system on vehicles that are not equipped with Anti Lock Brakes Ve
420. y use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 352 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE LOADING AND TIRE PRESSURE Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B Pillar 811adOdO Tire Placard Location Tire and Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRO THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS NEVER EXCEED XXX KG QR 4 T125 70D15 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RA 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry ee STARTING AND OPERATING 353 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflatio
421. you This can happen design This allows the airbag to have different rates of far away from home or on your own street inflation that are based on collision severity y Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they Please pay close attention to the information in this can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some section It tells you how to use your restraint system of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of possible 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should VARE be belted at all times e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area Lap Shoulder Belts inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people All seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap riding in these areas are more likely to be seri Shoulder Belts ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat The belt webbing in the retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with belts you under normal conditions But in a collision the belt Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of
422. ze Coolant Five Year 100 000 Mile For 13 4 Quarts 12 6 Liters mula or equivalent 3 8L Engine Mopar Antifreeze Coolant Five Year 100 000 Mile For 13 4 Quarts 12 6 Liters mula or equivalent 4 0L Engine Mopar Antifreeze Coolant Five Year 100 000 Mile For 13 4 Quarts 12 6 Liters mula or equivalent ncludes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level Add 2 9 Quarts 2 8 Liters if equipped with a rear heater ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Mopar Antifreeze Coolant Five Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology Engine Oil 3 3L 3 8L Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 engine oil meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 4 0L Use API Certified SAE 10W 30 engine oil Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Oil Filter 3 3L 3 8L Engines Mopar 4105409 or equivalent Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Oil Filter 4 0L Engines Mopar 5281090 or equivalent Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE grade pen Plugs 3 3L 3 8L 4 0L En rest p 13G Gap 050 in 127 mm Fuel Selection 3 3L 3 8L 87 Octane Fuel Selection 4 0L 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Recommended Engine Cool

2008 RT Town & Country Owner Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

2008 RT Town &amp; Country Owner Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

2008 RT Town & Country Owner Manual